Epson
®
SureColor
®
P6570/P8570/T3770/T5770/T7770 Series
User's Guide
3
Contents
SureColor P6570/P8570/T3770/T5770/T7770 Series User's Guide ........................................................ 13
Introduction to Your Printer...................................................................................................................... 14
Models Included in this Manual .......................................................................................................... 14
Product Features................................................................................................................................ 16
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts (U.S./Canada)......................................................... 17
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts (Latin America)........................................................ 18
Available Software ............................................................................................................................. 19
Notations Used in the Documentation ................................................................................................ 21
Printer Part Locations......................................................................................................................... 21
Product Parts - Front/Top .............................................................................................................. 22
Product Parts - Inside .................................................................................................................... 26
Product Parts - Back...................................................................................................................... 29
Using the Control Panel ..................................................................................................................... 30
Control Panel................................................................................................................................. 30
Changing the LCD Screen Language............................................................................................ 35
Selecting the Date and Time ......................................................................................................... 36
Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel ....................................................................... 37
Using AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 39
Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App.......................................................................................... 39
Using Power Saving Settings ............................................................................................................. 40
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings ............................................................................................... 40
Changing the Power Off Timer Settings ........................................................................................ 41
Printer Usage Guidelines ................................................................................................................... 42
Installation Space .......................................................................................................................... 43
Using Your Printer ......................................................................................................................... 44
Storing Your Printer ....................................................................................................................... 45
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking........................................................................................................................ 46
Network Security Recommendations ................................................................................................. 46
Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup......................................................................................................... 47
Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel ........................................................ 48
4
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup .................................................................................................................... 50
Enabling Wi-Fi Direct Mode........................................................................................................... 50
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)............................................................................................................. 51
Using WPS to Connect to a Network ............................................................................................. 52
Printing a Network Status Sheet......................................................................................................... 52
Printing a Network Connection Report ............................................................................................... 53
Network Connection Report Codes and Messages....................................................................... 55
Changing or Updating Network Connections ..................................................................................... 60
Accessing the Web Config Utility................................................................................................... 61
Changing a USB Connection to a Wi-Fi Connection...................................................................... 61
Changing a Wi-Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection...................................................... 62
Connecting to a New Wi-Fi Router ................................................................................................ 63
Disabling Wi-Fi Features ............................................................................................................... 63
Media Handling.......................................................................................................................................... 65
Media Handling Precautions .............................................................................................................. 65
Roll Paper Handling ........................................................................................................................... 67
Loading Roll 1/Roll Paper .............................................................................................................. 67
Loading Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only) ......................................................................................... 78
Cutting Roll Paper ......................................................................................................................... 90
Cutting Roll Paper Manually...................................................................................................... 90
Printing Cutting Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 91
Removing Roll 1/ Roll Paper.......................................................................................................... 92
Removing Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)...................................................................................... 96
Cut Sheet Handling .......................................................................................................................... 102
Loading Cut Sheets ..................................................................................................................... 102
Loading Poster Board.................................................................................................................. 112
Creating Custom Paper Settings...................................................................................................... 122
Selecting Custom Paper Configurations...................................................................................... 124
Creating Custom Paper Settings Using Epson Media Installer.................................................... 124
Edit Media Settings Options.................................................................................................... 127
Downloading Epson Media Settings ............................................................................................ 128
Paper Feed Adjustment.................................................................................................................... 129
Optimizing the Media Settings (Automatic Adjustment)............................................................... 130
5
Adjusting the Paper Feed ............................................................................................................ 130
About Auto Take-up (Dual Roll Models Only)................................................................................... 131
Loading Media for Auto Take-up ................................................................................................. 131
Removing the Auto Take-up Media ............................................................................................. 144
Available Epson Papers ................................................................................................................... 148
Borderless Paper Type Compatibility ............................................................................................... 161
Supported Paper Widths .................................................................................................................. 162
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software............................................................................ 167
Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel ......................................................... 169
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel ........................................................................................... 169
Printing from a Computer ....................................................................................................................... 171
Printing with Windows ...................................................................................................................... 171
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows .................................................................................... 172
Paper Source Options - Windows ........................................................................................... 175
Print Mode Options - Windows................................................................................................ 176
Color Mode Options - Windows .............................................................................................. 176
Using Layout Manager - Windows .......................................................................................... 179
Selecting Print Layout Options - Windows................................................................................... 184
Page Layout Options - Windows............................................................................................. 184
Selecting Advanced Settings - Windows ..................................................................................... 186
Roll Paper Options - Windows ................................................................................................ 187
Selecting Additional Settings - Windows ..................................................................................... 189
Saving, Sharing, and Customizing the Printer Settings ............................................................... 190
Saving and Sharing Print Settings - Windows......................................................................... 190
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows............................................................................... 192
Checking Print Status - Windows............................................................................................ 193
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows.................................................................................. 193
Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens............................................................ 194
Changing Automatic Update Options .......................................................................................... 196
Printing on a Mac ............................................................................................................................. 196
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac ............................................................................................ 197
Paper Size Options - Mac ....................................................................................................... 201
Paper Source Options - Mac................................................................................................... 202
6
Print Mode Options - Mac ....................................................................................................... 202
Color Mode Options - Mac ...................................................................................................... 203
Selecting Print Layout Options - Mac........................................................................................... 204
Selecting Advanced Settings - Mac ............................................................................................. 205
Selecting Roll Paper Settings - Mac ............................................................................................ 207
Selecting Paper Configuration Settings - Mac ............................................................................. 211
Managing Color - Mac ................................................................................................................. 211
Color Matching Options - Mac................................................................................................. 212
Sizing Printed Images - Mac........................................................................................................ 213
Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac .......................................................................................... 213
Printing Preferences - Mac...................................................................................................... 214
Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac ...................................................................................... 215
Checking Print Status - Mac.................................................................................................... 216
Printing CAD Drawings..................................................................................................................... 216
Printing CAD Drawings from the Printer Driver............................................................................ 217
Printing CAD Drawings in HP-GL/2 or HP RTL Mode.................................................................. 218
Printing from a Shared Folder .......................................................................................................... 220
Setting Up a Shared Folder from the Control Panel..................................................................... 221
Setting Up a Shared Folder Using Web Config............................................................................ 222
Printing from a Web Browser............................................................................................................ 223
Switching the Roll Paper for Printing ................................................................................................ 224
Switching Rolls According to Paper Type.................................................................................... 225
Switching Rolls According to Page Size ...................................................................................... 229
Switching Rolls when Paper Runs Out ........................................................................................ 233
Using the Integrated Scanner (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)........................................................... 236
Supported Document Sizes and Types............................................................................................ 236
Loading Originals ............................................................................................................................. 237
Using a Carrier Sheet....................................................................................................................... 240
Copying Documents or Photos......................................................................................................... 242
Copy Settings .............................................................................................................................. 245
Creating Scanning Contacts............................................................................................................. 248
Creating a Shared Network Folder .............................................................................................. 248
Registering Contacts for Email, Network, or FTP Scanning - Control Panel................................ 250
7
Registering Contacts for Email, Network Folder, or FTP Scanning - Web Config........................ 252
Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server ................................................................................... 253
Scan to Network Folder/FTP Settings ......................................................................................... 255
Scanning to Email ............................................................................................................................ 256
Scan to Email Settings................................................................................................................. 258
Scanning to a Memory Device.......................................................................................................... 261
Scan to Memory Device Settings................................................................................................. 262
Scanning to a Computer................................................................................................................... 264
Scanning to the SSD Unit................................................................................................................. 264
Scan to Storage Settings ............................................................................................................. 265
Printing from a USB Memory Device ..................................................................................................... 267
Connecting and Printing from a USB Memory Device ...................................................................... 267
Using the Solid State Drive (SSD) Unit .................................................................................................. 269
SSD Unit Storage Options................................................................................................................ 269
Using the SSD Unit from Your Computer ......................................................................................... 270
Creating a Storage Space ................................................................................................................ 273
Saving Data to Storage .................................................................................................................... 274
Saving Data to Storage - Windows .............................................................................................. 274
Saving Data to Storage - Mac...................................................................................................... 275
Saving Data from a USB Memory Device to Storage................................................................... 276
Printing Stored Data ......................................................................................................................... 276
Managing Storage Spaces and Documents ..................................................................................... 276
Searching for Storage Spaces and Documents........................................................................... 277
Deleting a Document from Storage ............................................................................................. 277
Changing the Storage Period ...................................................................................................... 277
Deleting a Storage Space............................................................................................................ 278
Restricting Operations for Shared Storage Spaces ..................................................................... 278
Using the Control Panel Menus.............................................................................................................. 279
Accessing the Printer's Menus ......................................................................................................... 279
Paper Setting Menu.......................................................................................................................... 280
Basic Settings Menu......................................................................................................................... 293
Printer Settings Menu....................................................................................................................... 296
Network Settings Menu .................................................................................................................... 308
8
Scan Settings Menu (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM) .................................................................... 309
Memory Device Settings Menu......................................................................................................... 310
Network Folder Menu ....................................................................................................................... 314
Storage Settings Menu..................................................................................................................... 316
User Settings Menu.......................................................................................................................... 317
System Administration Menu............................................................................................................ 318
Maintenance Menu........................................................................................................................... 322
Printer Status Menu.......................................................................................................................... 324
Replacing Consumables......................................................................................................................... 326
Ink Safety Precautions ..................................................................................................................... 326
Check Ink and Maintenance Box Status........................................................................................... 329
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status on the LCD Screen .................................................. 329
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status with Windows .......................................................... 330
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status - Mac ....................................................................... 332
Purchase Epson Ink and Maintenance Box ..................................................................................... 333
Ink and Maintenance Box Part Numbers ..................................................................................... 333
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges............................................................................................ 335
Removing and Installing Ink Supply Units (Ink Packs)...................................................................... 339
Replacing the Maintenance Box....................................................................................................... 343
Replacing the Borderless Maintenance Boxes................................................................................. 347
Adjusting Print Quality............................................................................................................................ 352
Print Head Maintenance................................................................................................................... 352
Print Head Nozzle Check............................................................................................................. 353
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel ......................................................... 353
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility...................................................................... 354
Print Head Cleaning .................................................................................................................... 355
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel ...................................................... 355
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility................................................................... 357
Running a Power Cleaning Using the Product Control Panel.................................................. 358
Adjusting the Paper Feed Using the Product Control Panel ........................................................ 359
Ruled Line Alignment .................................................................................................................. 360
Aligning the Print Head Automatically Using the Product Control Panel ................................. 361
Aligning the Print Head Manually Using the Product Control Panel ........................................ 362
9
Cleaning the Roll Paper Feeder ....................................................................................................... 363
Maintenance and Transportation ........................................................................................................... 364
Replacing the Cutter......................................................................................................................... 364
Cleaning Your Product ..................................................................................................................... 368
Cleaning the Platen and Borderless Pad Edges............................................................................... 369
Wiping Around the Print Head .......................................................................................................... 373
Cleaning the Print Head Cap Area ................................................................................................... 378
Moving or Transporting Your Product............................................................................................... 391
Discharging Ink............................................................................................................................ 395
Solving Problems .................................................................................................................................... 397
Checking for Software Updates........................................................................................................ 397
Product Status Messages ................................................................................................................ 398
Resetting Control Panel Defaults ..................................................................................................... 399
Solving Printer Problems.................................................................................................................. 400
Product Does Not Turn On or Turns Off Unexpectedly................................................................ 400
LCD Screen Shuts Off ................................................................................................................. 400
Media Does Not Cut Cleanly ....................................................................................................... 400
Red Light Shines Inside the Printer ............................................................................................. 401
Product Stops Printing Unexpectedly .......................................................................................... 401
Forgot the Administrator Password ............................................................................................. 402
Software Installation Problems .................................................................................................... 402
Solving Network Problems ............................................................................................................... 402
Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point .................................................. 403
Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network................................................................. 404
Product Does Not Appear in Mac Printer Window ....................................................................... 405
Wired Network Connection Becomes Unstable........................................................................... 406
Cannot Print Over a Network....................................................................................................... 406
Solving Printing Problems ................................................................................................................ 408
Nothing Prints.............................................................................................................................. 408
Print Head Moves But Nothing Prints .......................................................................................... 408
Solving Paper Problems................................................................................................................... 409
Paper Feeding Problems............................................................................................................. 409
Roll Paper Jam Problems............................................................................................................ 411
10
Cut Sheet Paper Jam Problems .................................................................................................. 415
Paper Does Not Collect in the Basket or is Creased.................................................................... 418
Solving Print Quality Problems......................................................................................................... 419
Nozzle Check Pattern Prints Incorrectly ...................................................................................... 419
Overall Print Quality is Poor......................................................................................................... 419
Lines Are Misaligned ................................................................................................................... 421
Prints are Scuffed or Smeared .................................................................................................... 421
Prints are Wrinkled ...................................................................................................................... 422
Margins Appear in Borderless Prints ........................................................................................... 422
Solving Scanning Problems (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM) ........................................................ 423
Cannot Feed Originals Correctly ................................................................................................. 424
Removing a Jammed Original (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM) ................................................ 425
Scanned Image is Misaligned...................................................................................................... 427
Adjusting Scanned Image Stitching ........................................................................................ 427
Lines Appear on Scanned or Copied Documents........................................................................ 429
Scanned Image Size Does Not Match Print Size ........................................................................ 431
Scanner Slot Has Detached ........................................................................................................ 432
Uninstall Your Product Software....................................................................................................... 432
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows.................................................................................... 433
Uninstalling Product Software - Mac............................................................................................ 434
Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada) ............................................................................................. 434
Where to Get Help (Latin America)................................................................................................... 435
Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 438
Windows System Requirements ...................................................................................................... 438
Mac System Requirements .............................................................................................................. 439
Printing Specifications...................................................................................................................... 439
Paper Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 440
Printable Area Specifications ........................................................................................................... 441
Ink Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 443
Dimension Specifications ................................................................................................................. 445
Electrical Specifications ................................................................................................................... 445
Environmental Specifications ........................................................................................................... 446
Interface Specifications .................................................................................................................... 447
11
Network Interface Specifications ...................................................................................................... 448
Scanning Specifications (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM) .............................................................. 449
Safety and Approvals Specifications ................................................................................................ 450
Notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 452
Important Safety Instructions............................................................................................................ 452
General Product Safety Instructions ............................................................................................ 452
LCD Screen Safety Instructions................................................................................................... 455
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions ..................................................................................... 456
FCC Compliance Statement............................................................................................................. 456
Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver ............................................................................................... 457
Trademarks...................................................................................................................................... 460
Copyright Notice............................................................................................................................... 460
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials................................................... 461
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products ............................................... 461
Copyright Attribution.................................................................................................................... 461
13
SureColor P6570/P8570/T3770/T5770/T7770 Series User's
Guide
Welcome to the SureColor P6570/P8570/T3770/T5770/T7770 Series User's Guide.
For a printable PDF copy of this guide, click here.
Note: Availability of products in this guide varies by country.
14
Introduction to Your Printer
Refer to these sections to learn more about your printer and this manual.
Note: The SureColor T7770D is shown in most illustrations in this manual, but the instructions apply to
all models unless noted otherwise.
Models Included in this Manual
Product Features
Available Software
Notations Used in the Documentation
Printer Part Locations
Using the Control Panel
Using AirPrint
Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App
Using Power Saving Settings
Printer Usage Guidelines
Models Included in this Manual
The table below provides a brief description of the models covered in this manual.
Note: Product availability varies by country and region.
Model Description
SureColor P6570 Series
SureColor P6570D 24-inch, wide-format printer
Dual roll: SureColor P6570D/P6570DE
Single roll: SureColor P6570E
UltraChrome PRO6 with Gray ink cartridges
Adobe Embedded Print Engine included: SureColor P6570D (not
available for SureColor P6570DE/P6570E)
SureColor P6570DE
SureColor P6570E
SureColor P8570 Series
15
Model Description
SureColor P8570D 44-inch, dual roll, wide-format printer
UltraChrome PRO6 with Gray ink cartridges: SureColor P8570D
UltraChrome PRO6 with Gray ink supply units (ink packs): SureColor
P8570DL
Adobe Embedded Print Engine included
SureColor P8570DL
SureColor T3770 Series
SureColor T3770D 24-inch, large-format printer
Dual roll: SureColor T3770D/T3770DE
Single roll: SureColor T3770E
UltraChrome XD3 with Red ink cartridges
Adobe Embedded Print Engine included: SureColor T3770D (not
available for SureColor T3770DE/T3770E)
SureColor T3770DE
SureColor T3770E
SureColor T5770 Series
SureColor T5770D 36-inch, dual roll, large-format printer
UltraChrome XD3 with Red ink cartridges
Adobe Embedded Print Engine included
SSD unit included: SureColor T5770DM (optional for all other
models)
SureColor T5770DM
SureColor T7770 Series
SureColor T7770D 44-inch, dual roll, large-format printer
UltraChrome XD3 with Red ink cartridges: SureColor
T7770D/T7770DM
UltraChrome XD3 with Red ink supply units (ink packs): SureColor
T7770DL
Adobe Embedded Print Engine included
SSD unit included: SureColor T7770DM (optional for all other
models)
SureColor T7770DL
SureColor T7770DM
Parent topic: Introduction to Your Printer
16
Product Features
The Epson SureColor P6570/P8570/T3770/T5770/T7770 Series printers include these special features:
High productivity
• Print accurate A1/D-size prints in 16 seconds on plain paper
• Print posters, photos, and POP displays at speeds over 300 sq ft/hr, and CAD and technical drawings
at speeds over 1400 sq ft/hr
• Available 110-, 350-, or 700-ml ink cartridges (SureColor P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E/
P8570D/T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E/T5770D/T5770DM/T7770D/T7770DM)
• Available 1600 ml high-capacity ink supply units (ink packs) (SureColor P8570DL/T7770DL)
• HP-GL/2 or HP RTL support for CAD software
• SuperSpeed USB 3.0, Ethernet, or Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) connectivity
• Wirelessly print from computers, tablets, or smartphones
• Direct printing from USB memory devices
• Printing files from shared folders
• Uploading print files through a web interface
• Adobe Embedded Print Engine for faster processing of complex data (not available for SureColor
P6570DE/P6570E/P3770DE/P3770E)
Reliability
• 2.64-inch PrecisionCore MicroTFP printhead offers Precision Droplet Control
• Improved anti-dust design for reduced print head nozzle maintenance
• Enhanced security features including SSD encryption and IC card option for user control and tracking
High resolution
• Prints at resolutions up to 2400 dpi
• Supports two types of black ink for printing documents or graphics
Easy-to-use setup and operation
• Intuitive, easy-to-read, 4.3-inch, color LCD touchscreen
• Compact, flattop design with complete front operation for simple roll loading
• Automatically switch between two media types or sizes, or use second roll as a take-up reel (dual roll
models only)
17
• Easy-to-use software
• Improved media setting software
• Automatically switches between Photo Black and Matte Black inks according to media type
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts (U.S./Canada)
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts (Latin America)
Parent topic: Introduction to Your Printer
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts (U.S./Canada)
You can purchase genuine Epson ink, paper, and accessories from an Epson authorized reseller. To
find the nearest reseller, visit proimaging.epson.com (U.S.) or proimaging.epson.ca (Canada), select
your product series and product, and click the Where to Buy button. Or call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-
7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada.
Option or part Part number
Replacement printer cutter blade C13S210117
Maintenance box C13S210115
Borderless maintenance box C13S210116
Cleaning stick C13S090013
SSD unit* C12C936671
Roll media spindle (24") (SureColor
P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E/T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E)
C12C937711
Roll media spindle (36") (SureColor T5770D/T5770DM) C12C937671
Roll media spindle (44") (SureColor
P8570D/P8570DL/T7770D/T7770DL/T7770DM)
C12C936171
One-year Epson Preferred Plus Commercial Service and Support
Plan (SureColor P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E)
EPPP6500S1
One-year Epson Preferred Plus Commercial Service and Support
Plan (SureColor P8570D/P8570DL)
EPPP8500S1
One-year Epson Preferred Plus Commercial Service and Support
Plan (SureColor T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E)
EPPT3700S1
One-year Epson Preferred Plus Commercial Service and Support
Plan (SureColor T5770D/T5770DM)
EPPT5700S1
18
Option or part Part number
One-year Epson Preferred Plus Commercial Service and Support
Plan (SureColor T7770D/T7770DL/T7770DM)
EPPT7700S1
Two-Year Epson Preferred Plus On-Site Commercial Service and
Support Plan (SureColor P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E)
EPPP6500S2
Two-Year Epson Preferred Plus On-Site Commercial Service and
Support Plan (SureColor P8570D/P8570DL)
EPPP8500S2
Two-Year Epson Preferred Plus On-Site Commercial Service and
Support Plan (SureColor T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E)
EPPT3700S2
Two-Year Epson Preferred Plus On-Site Commercial Service and
Support Plan (SureColor T5770D/T5770DM)
EPPT5700S2
Two-Year Epson Preferred Plus On-Site Commercial Service and
Support Plan (SureColor T7770D/T7770DL/T7770DM)
EPPT7700S2
Four-year Epson Preferred Plus Commercial Service and Support
Plan (SureColor P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E)
EPPP6500S4
Four-year Epson Preferred Plus Commercial Service and Support
Plan (SureColor P8570D/P8570DL)
EPPP8500S4
Four-year Epson Preferred Plus Commercial Service and Support
Plan (SureColor T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E)
EPPT3700S4
Four-year Epson Preferred Plus Commercial Service and Support
Plan (SureColor T5770D/T5770DM)
EPPT5700S4
Four-year Epson Preferred Plus Commercial Service and Support
Plan (SureColor T7770D/T7770DL/T7770DM)
EPPT7700S4
* Included with SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM; optional for all other models.
Parent topic: Product Features
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts (Latin America)
You can purchase genuine Epson ink, paper, and accessories from an Epson authorized reseller. To
find the nearest reseller, visit latin.epson.com or call your nearest Epson sales office.
Note: Availability of accessories varies by country.
19
Option or part Part number
Replacement printer cutter blade C13S210117
Maintenance box C13S210115
Borderless maintenance box C13S210116
Cleaning stick C13S090013
SSD unit* C12C936671
Roll media spindle (24") (SureColor
P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E/T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E)
C12C937711
Roll media spindle (36") (SureColor T5770D/T5770DM) C12C937671
Roll media spindle (44") (SureColor
P8570D/P8570DL/T7770D/T7770DL/T7770DM)
C12C936171
* Included with SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM; optional for all other models.
Parent topic: Product Features
Available Software
The table below provides an overview of the software available for your product.
You can download and install the necessary software from the Epson website using the instructions on
the Start Here sheet. For detailed information about the software on your system, see the software help
or the online Administrator's Guide.
Note: An internet connection is required to obtain the product software.
Software Description
Printer driver Allows your computer to communicate specifically with your printer.
Before printing from your computer, make sure you have set up your
product and installed the latest software.
PS printer driver
(not available for SureColor
P6570DE/P6570E/T3770DE/
T3770E)
Select when printing using the Adobe Embedded Print Engine.
20
Software Description
PS Folder
(not available for SureColor
P6570DE/P6570E/T3770DE/
T3770E)
Allows models equipped with the Adobe Embedded Print Engine to
print by simply dragging and dropping the corresponding file onto the
PS Folder icon.
Epson Software Updater Periodically checks for software updates and then notifies you and
installs the software if an update is available. You can select the
interval for update checks and make settings for receiving update
notifications. In addition to driver updates, also allows you to update
product firmware and previously installed applications, and install
additional software that is compatible with the printer.
LFP Print Plug-In for Office
(Windows only)
Plug-in software for Microsoft Office applications (Word, Excel, and
PowerPoint) that allows you to display ribbon items in Office
applications that provide quick access to horizontal and vertical
banner printing and enlarged printing. Supports Microsoft Office
versions 2003 or later.
Epson Edge Dashboard Allows you to manage the status of multiple printers and easily copy
custom paper settings from one printer to another.
Epson Media Installer Allows you to download paper information, including ICC profiles,
print modes, and print control parameters, from Internet servers and
save it in the printer or printer driver.
EpsonNet Config SE Software to configure the initial settings of the network or change
network settings universally when installing or relocating Epson
printers and scanners. Visit the Epson website to download and run
EpsonNet Config SE. See the online Administrator's Guide for more
information.
Epson Scan 2 (SureColor
T5770DM/T7770DM only)
Install this driver if you want to use the scanner.
Document Capture Pro
(Windows) or Document Capture
(Mac) (SureColor
T5770DM/T7770DM only)
Allows you to easily and efficiently digitize originals. Install this
software if you want to save scanned data to your computer.
21
Software Description
Web Config Pre-installed software that allows you to access your printer from a
web browser via a network, and perform administrative functions
such as checking ink levels, updating firmware, configuring network
and advanced security settings, and editing custom paper settings
that can then be exported to a file or imported to another printer. Also
provides an e-mail notification function to inform you when printer
errors occur.
Epson Print Automate Allows you to customize and print posters quickly and on-demand by
simply dragging and dropping them directly into the print window.
Visit the Epson website to download and run Epson Print Automate.
See the software help for more information.
Parent topic: Introduction to Your Printer
Notations Used in the Documentation
Follow the guidelines in these notations as you read your documentation:
• Warnings must be followed carefully to avoid bodily injury.
• Cautions must be observed to avoid damage to your equipment.
• Notes contain important information about your printer.
• Tips contain additional printing information.
Parent topic: Introduction to Your Printer
Printer Part Locations
Check the printer part illustrations to learn about the parts on your printer.
Note: The illustrations in this section show a dual roll model (SureColor
P6570D/P6570DE/P8570D/P8570DL/T3770D/T3770DE/T5770D/T5770DM/T7770D/T7770DL/T7770D
M), but the descriptions are the same for single roll models (SureColor P6570E/T3770E) unless noted
otherwise.
Product Parts - Front/Top
Product Parts - Inside
Product Parts - Back
22
Parent topic: Introduction to Your Printer
Product Parts - Front/Top
1 Maintenance cover
Open to replace auto cutter blade
2 Paper support
Adjust position according to media type; set to top position when replacing borderless
maintenance box
3 Roll 1 (known as Roll paper on SureColor P6570E/T3770E); can be used optionally as a take-up
reel on dual roll models
4 Roll 2 (not available on SureColor P6570E/T3770E)
5 Security lock slot
23
6 USB memory port
Print directly from a connected USB memory device
7 Paper basket
8 Control panel
9 Printer cover
Open to clean inside printer or clear paper jams
10 Paper support lock lever
11 Front caster
Scanner (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM only)
1 Scanner cover
Open cover to clear paper jams
2 Scanner slot
Insert originals to be scanned
3 Scanner edge guide
Allows you to feed originals straight into the printer; store the edge guide when opening the
scanner cover
24
4 Lock lever
Press the left and right lock levers to open the scanner cover
Roll Paper Area
1 Spindle lock lever
2 Paper stop
Secures the roll paper on the spindle; attach or remove the transparent paper stop when loading
roll paper
25
3 Spindle
4 Roll paper core adapter
5 Roll 2 unit lock lever (not available on SureColor P6570E/T3770E)
6 Roll 2 unit (not available on SureColor P6570E/T3770E)
7 Roll 2 eject button (not available on SureColor P6570E/T3770E)
8 Roll 1/Roll paper eject button
9 Manual take-up button (not available on SureColor P6570E/T3770E)
Manually take up media when Roll 1 is set to automatic take-up
10 Pause/resume button (not available on SureColor P6570E/T3770E)
11 Take-up direction switch (not available on SureColor P6570E/T3770E)
When using Roll 1 for automatic take-up, select the take-up direction (printable side out/printable
side in)
12 Borderless maintenance box
Maintenance box for borderless printing
Parent topic: Printer Part Locations
Related references
Roll Paper Jam Problems
Cut Sheet Paper Jam Problems
Related tasks
Replacing the Cutter
Replacing the Borderless Maintenance Boxes
Loading Media for Auto Take-up
Loading Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Cleaning Your Product
Related topics
Printing from a USB Memory Device
26
Product Parts - Inside
1 Auto cutter blade
2 Print head
3 Drying prevention caps
Cover the print head nozzles to prevent them from drying when not printing
4 Wipers
Used to wipe off ink that is stuck to the surface of the print head nozzles
5 Suction cap
Pulls the optimum amount of ink from the print head nozzles during head cleaning
27
Ink Cartridge Compartment
(SureColor P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E/P8570D/T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E/
T5770D/T5770DM/T7770D/T7770DM)
1 Ink cartridge cover
2 Maintenance box cover
3 Maintenance box
4 Ink cartridges
28
Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack) Compartment
(SureColor P8570DL/T7770DL)
1 Accessory case
2 Maintenance box cover
3 Maintenance box
4 Ink supply unit (ink pack)
5 Lock switch
Parent topic: Printer Part Locations
Related tasks
Replacing the Cutter
Wiping Around the Print Head
Cleaning the Platen and Borderless Pad Edges
29
Cleaning the Print Head Cap Area
Product Parts - Back
1 Port cover
2 Ethernet LAN port
3 USB port (for computer connection)
4 SSD unit slot
SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM come with an SSD unit installed; the SSD unit is an option for all
other models
5 Adobe Embedded Print Engine (not available for SureColor P6570DE/P6570E/T3770DE/T3770E)
6 DC inlet (connect supplied power cable)
7 Security lock slot
30
8 Rear cover
9 Rear paper feed slot (for feeding cut sheet/poster board from the rear)
10 Adjustable feet
Parent topic: Printer Part Locations
Using the Control Panel
See these sections to learn about the control panel and select control panel settings.
Control Panel
Changing the LCD Screen Language
Selecting the Date and Time
Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel
Parent topic: Introduction to Your Printer
Control Panel
1 authentication system icon; tap to switch to authentication system
2
home icon
3
power button
4 back icon; lit only when an authentication system is connected
5 LCD touchscreen
31
6 Error alert light; check the control panel for error details when lit
7
stop icon
8 information icon; tap to access ink information and view job history
Note: For SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM models, tap the information icon and then tap the
scan icon to operate the scanner.
9 authentication system logout icon; tap to log out of the authentication system
32
LCD Screen
Note: The home screen varies depending on the printer model and options installed. You can select the
screen switching icon to toggle between the home screen and the ink level display.
33
SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM only
1 Access menu items
2 Displays the printer's status, error messages, and other information.
3 Displays roll paper information
When roll paper is not loaded, - - - is displayed.
4 Switches the paper source
Select during printing to print the next page from the selected paper source. If there is no paper
loaded in either paper source, select to display the Paper Setting screen.
5 Displays the amount of ink remaining
The abbreviation below each bar indicates the ink color.
PK: Photo Black
MK: Matte Black
Y: Yellow
M: Magenta
C: Cyan
GY: Gray (SureColor P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E/P8570D/P8570DL)
R: Red (SureColor T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E/T5770D/T5770DM/T7770D/T7770DL/T7770DM)
When the notification icon is displayed, the corresponding ink color is running low. Tap the
display area to check the model number of the ink cartridge or ink pack.
34
6
Displays the amount of space remaining in the borderless maintenance boxes. When the
notification icon is displayed, the corresponding box is almost full. Tap the display area to check
the borderless maintenance box model number.
7 Displays the amount of space remaining in the maintenance box
When the notification icon is displayed, the maintenance box is almost full. Tap the display
area to check the maintenance box model number.
8 Paper release icon
Releases the paper roll for easy removal when performing tasks such as switching out media or
clearing paper jams; disabled during paper feeding or printing.
9 Network status icons; select to switch the network connection status
: No Ethernet connection
: Ethernet connection established
: No Wi-Fi connection
: Wi-Fi network error or the product is searching for a connection
: Wi-Fi connection established; the number of bars indicates signal strength
: No Wi-Fi Direct connection
: Wi-Fi Direct connection established
Note: Wireless LAN may not be supported depending on the specifications and destination. If this
is the case, use a wired LAN instead.
10 Displays the Maintenance menu
You can check and clean the print head nozzles, replace consumables, and clean parts.
11 Switches the home screen display
12 Turns the internal light on or off; turn on to check print in progress
35
13 Displays settings for feeding and cutting roll paper
14 Displays the Paper Setting menu
Select when loading, removing, setting, or adjusting paper.
15 Displays the Network Folder menu
Select to print a file from a shared network folder (shared folder must be set up in advance).
16 Displays the Help menu
Note: When the SSD unit is installed, the Storage menu is displayed. You can make storage
settings which allow you to store documents in the SSD unit and print them when needed.
17 Displays the Copy menu (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM only)
18 Displays the Scan menu (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM only)
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Changing the LCD Screen Language
You can change the language used on the LCD screen.
1. Select the home icon, if necessary.
2. Select the Menu icon.
3. Select General Settings > Basic Settings > Language.
You see this screen:
36
4. Select a language.
5. Select the home icon to exit.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Selecting the Date and Time
Before using your product, select the current date, time, and daylight saving phase in your area, and
choose your preferred date and time format.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Select the home icon, if necessary.
2. Select the Menu icon.
3. Select General Settings > Basic Settings > Date/Time Settings.
You see this screen:
4. Select Date/Time.
5. Select the date format you want to use.
6. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the current date and select OK.
7. Select the time format you want to use.
8. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the current time and select OK.
37
9. Select Daylight Saving Time and select either Summer or Winter.
10. Select the home icon to exit.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel
You can set an administrator password to lock the following settings and prevent them from being
changed:
Note: The locked settings may differ depending on your product.
• Network settings
• Certain Basic Settings
• Certain Printer Settings
• Certain Maintenance Settings
• System Administration settings
• Web Config settings
• EpsonNet Config settings
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance. For more information on administration settings, see the online
Administrator's Guide.
1. Select the home icon, if necessary.
2. Select the Menu icon.
3. Select General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings > Admin Settings.
38
You see a screen like this:
4. Select Admin Password > Change.
5. Do one of the following:
• If you have set an administrator password before, enter the current password, then enter and
confirm the new password in the fields provided.
• If you have not set an administrator password before, enter the default password in the current
password field, then enter a new password and confirm it in the fields provided.
Note: The default password is the product's serial number. Check the label on the back of the printer
to locate the serial number.
6. Select OK.
7. Select Lock Setting > On to lock settings.
A prompt appears confirming that you want to enable locked settings. Select Yes to enable the
setting and return to the home screen.
The lock setting icon is displayed on the home screen when the lock setting is enabled.
You must enter the admin password to access any of the locked settings.
Note: You can restore the administrator password to the default password by selecting Restore Default
Settings on the Admin Password screen and entering the administrator password. If you forget your
password, contact Epson for assistance.
39
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Related tasks
Accessing the Web Config Utility
Using AirPrint
AirPrint enables instant wireless printing from iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, and Mac without the need to
install drivers or download software.
1. Load paper in your product.
2. Set up your product for wireless printing. See the link below.
3. Connect your Apple device to the same wireless network that your product is using.
4. Print from your device to your product.
Note: For details, see the AirPrint page on the Apple website.
Parent topic: Introduction to Your Printer
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App
Use this free Apple and Android app to set up and control your Epson product. Epson Smart Panel also
lets you check product status.
Note: App features may vary depending on your Epson product.
1. Visit epson.com/connect (U.S.), epson.ca/connect (Canada), or latin.epson.com/connect (Latin
America) to learn more about Epson Smart Panel and check the compatibility of your mobile device.
2. Download Epson Smart Panel from the Apple App Store or Google Play.
40
3. Do one of the following:
• If your Epson product is already connected to a wireless network, connect your mobile device to
the same network. Then open Epson Smart Panel and select your Epson product, if necessary.
• If your Epson product is not connected to a wireless network, connect your mobile device to the
network you want to use, then open Epson Smart Panel and follow the instructions to set up your
Epson product.
Now you are ready to control your Epson product with your mobile device.
Parent topic: Introduction to Your Printer
Using Power Saving Settings
Your product enters sleep mode automatically and turns off the LCD screen if it is not used for a period
of time. You can make the time period shorter and select other options to save energy and resources.
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings
Changing the Power Off Timer Settings
Parent topic: Introduction to Your Printer
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings
You can adjust the time period before your product enters sleep mode and turns off the LCD screen.
Note: The default setting is 15 minutes.
1. Select the home icon, if necessary.
2. Select the Menu icon.
3. Select General Settings > Basic Settings > Sleep Timer.
41
You see a screen like this:
4. Do one of the following:
• Press the + or – button to increase or decrease the number of minutes.
• Press the number to display the on-screen keypad, select the number of minutes (between 1 and
120), and select OK.
5. Select OK.
When your product enters sleep mode, the control panel's screen goes dark, but the power light
remains on.
Parent topic: Using Power Saving Settings
Changing the Power Off Timer Settings
You can have the product turn off automatically if it is not used for a specified period of time.
Note: The default setting is Off.
1. Select the home icon, if necessary.
2. Select the Menu icon.
3. Select General Settings > Basic Settings > Power Off Timer.
42
You see a screen like this:
4. Select a time period between 30minutes and 12h (12 hours).
Note: Increasing the time will affect the printer’s energy efficiency. Please consider the environment
before making any changes.
Parent topic: Using Power Saving Settings
Printer Usage Guidelines
Follow the guidelines in these sections as you use your printer, consumables, and print media.
Installation Space
Using Your Printer
Storing Your Printer
Parent topic: Introduction to Your Printer
43
Installation Space
Make sure that you clear the following amount of working space so that you can eject paper and replace
consumables as necessary for your model.
44
Model Width (W) Space required
when not using cut
sheets/poster board
(D1)
Space required
when using cut
sheets/poster board
(D2)
SureColor
P8570D/P8570DL/T7770D/
T7770DL/T7770DM
78.26 inches (1988
mm)
44.44 inches (1129
mm)
62.99 in. (1600 mm)
in front of and behind
printer, plus working
space (space may
vary depending on
paper size)
SureColor T5770D/T5770DM 70.27 inches (1785
mm)
SureColor
P6570D/P6570DE/T3770D/
T3770DE
59.25 inches (1505
mm)
SureColor P6570E/T3770E 32.63 inches (829
mm)
1
For SureColor P6570E/T3770E, working space required is 13 inches (330 mm)
Parent topic: Printer Usage Guidelines
Using Your Printer
Follow these guidelines as you use your printer:
• Operate the printer only within the specified operating temperature and humidity range for your
product and your media.
• Check to make sure you maintain the specified humidity range, especially in dry areas or air
conditioned environments.
• Keep the printer out of direct sunlight.
• Do not install the printer next to heat sources or directly in the path of exhaust from a ventilator or air
conditioner. Failure to observe this precaution could result in the print head nozzles drying out and
clogging.
• Make sure the product work space is kept free of dust or lint that could damage your product or clog
the print head nozzles.
• Perform maintenance operations according to usage frequency or at the recommended intervals.
Failure to perform regular maintenance could reduce print quality or damage the print head.
45
• If an error occurs and the printer is turned off without first resolving the error, the print head may not be
in the home position, which may cause the print head to dry out. In this case, turn on the power and
wait until the carriage is in the home position.
• When the printer is on, do not disconnect the power cable or cut the power at the circuit breaker. The
print head may not be in the home position. In this case, turn on the power and wait a while until the
print head is in the home position.
Note: To keep the print head in the optimum operating condition, ink is used in maintenance operations
such as head cleaning.
Parent topic: Printer Usage Guidelines
Related concepts
Print Head Maintenance
Related references
Environmental Specifications
Storing Your Printer
Follow these guidelines if you need to store your printer for a long period:
• If the printer is not used for an extended period of time, the print head nozzles may become clogged.
We recommend that you print once every week to prevent the nozzles from clogging.
• Remove any loaded media before storing the printer to prevent the pressure rollers from causing
creases in the media, which may cause jams or damage to the print head.
• Make sure that the print head is in the home position before storing the printer. If it is left away from the
home position for a long time, the print quality may decline. Turn the printer on and then off again to
move the print head to the home position.
• Close all the covers on the printer to prevent dust and debris from getting in. If the printer will be not be
used for an extended period of time, protect it with an anti-static cloth or other cover. The print head
nozzles can become clogged if fine dust gets on the print head, and you may not be able to print
properly.
• If the printer is turned on after an extended period of time with the power off, the printer may
automatically perform head cleaning to ensure print quality.
Parent topic: Printer Usage Guidelines
Related concepts
Print Head Maintenance
46
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
See these sections to use your product on a Wi-Fi or wired network.
Network Security Recommendations
Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Printing a Network Status Sheet
Printing a Network Connection Report
Changing or Updating Network Connections
Network Security Recommendations
To help deter unauthorized access to your product over a network, you should protect your network
environment using appropriate security measures.
Security measures such as these can help deter threats such as loss of user data, use of telephone and
fax lines, and other intrusions:
• Enable security on your wireless LAN
Enable the appropriate security on the wireless LAN you plan to use with your product. Network
security such as a network password can deter interception of traffic over the wireless LAN. Your
router may already have a default password enabled by your Internet service provider (ISP). See your
ISP and router documentation for instructions on how to change the default password and better
secure your network.
• Connect your product only to a network protected by a firewall
Connecting your product directly to the Internet may leave it vulnerable to security threats. Instead,
connect it to a router or other network connection protected by a firewall. Your router may already
have a firewall set up by your Internet service provider; check with your ISP for confirmation. For best
results, set up and use a private IP address for your network connection.
• Change the default administrator password on your product
If your product has an option to set an administrator password, change the default administrator
password to deter access by unauthorized users to personal data stored on your product, such as IDs,
passwords, and contact lists.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
47
Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup
You can set up your product to communicate with your computer using a wireless router or access point.
The wireless router or access point can be connected to your computer over a wireless or wired network.
Note: You cannot connect to a wired and wireless network at the same time.
1 Epson product
2 Wireless router or access point
3 Computer with a wireless interface
4 Computer
5 Internet
6 Ethernet cable (used only for wired connection to the wireless router or access point)
Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
48
Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel
You can select or change wireless network settings using your product control panel.
To install your product on a wireless network, install the necessary software by downloading it from the
Epson website. The installer program guides you through network setup.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Select the home icon, if necessary.
2. Select the network icon.
Note: Icon may look different depending on connection status.
3. Select Router > Start Setup or Change Settings > Wi-Fi Setup Wizard.
4. Select the name of your wireless network or select Enter Manually to enter the name manually. Use
the on-screen keyboard to enter your network name.
Note: If you enter the wireless network manually, select Available for Password, and then enter the
password.
5. Select the Enter Password field and enter your wireless password using the on-screen keyboard.
49
Note: The network name and password are case sensitive. Be sure to correctly enter uppercase and
lowercase letters, and numeric or special characters.
• To move the cursor, press the left or right arrows.
• To enter numbers or symbols, select 123#.
• To change the case of letters, select .
• To delete the previous character, select .
• To enter a space, select Space.
6. Select OK when you finish entering your password.
7. Confirm the displayed network settings and select Start Setup to save them.
8. If you want to print a network connection report, select Print Check Report. (Otherwise, select OK.)
9. Select the home icon to exit.
You see the Wi-Fi Direct icon on the LCD screen and should be able to connect to your product
directly from your computer or device, and then print. If you are printing from a computer, make sure
you installed the network software from the Epson website.
Note: If you don't see the Wi-Fi Direct icon, you may have selected the wrong network name or
entered the password incorrectly. Repeat these steps to try again.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup
Related references
Control Panel
Related tasks
Accessing the Web Config Utility
50
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
You can set up your product to communicate directly with your computer or another device without
requiring a wireless router or access point. In Wi-Fi Direct Mode, the product itself acts as a network
access point for up to 4 devices.
1 Epson product
2 Computer with a wireless interface
3 Other wireless device
Enabling Wi-Fi Direct Mode
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Enabling Wi-Fi Direct Mode
You can enable Wi-Fi Direct mode to allow direct communication between your product and computer or
other devices without a wireless router or access point.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Select the home icon, if necessary.
2. Select the network icon.
Note: Icon may look different depending on connection status.
51
3. Select Wi-Fi Direct > Start Setup > Start Setup.
Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, and the Wi-Fi network name (SSID) and password are displayed.
Note: If Wi-Fi Direct is already enabled, the network name (SSID), password, number of connected
devices, and general procedures for setting up other devices are displayed.
4. Use your computer or wireless device to select the Wi-Fi network name (SSID) displayed on the
LCD screen, then enter the password shown.
5. When a connection is established, select Close to finish.
6. Select Close on LCD screen to close the network connection settings screen.
7. Select the home icon to exit.
You see the Wi-Fi Direct icon on the LCD screen and should be able to connect to your product
directly from your computer or device, and then print. If you are printing from a computer, make sure
you installed the network software from the Epson website.
Note: If you don't see the Wi-Fi Direct icon on the LCD screen, you may have selected the wrong
network name or entered the password incorrectly. Repeat these steps to try again.
Any connected devices will be disconnected when you turn off the printer. To reconnect after turning the
printer back on, repeat these steps.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
Related references
Control Panel
Related tasks
Accessing the Web Config Utility
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
If your network uses a WPS-enabled wireless router or access point, you can quickly connect your
product to the network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS).
Note: To check if your router is WPS-enabled, look for a button labeled WPS on your router or access
point. If there is no hardware button, there may be a virtual WPS button in the software for the device.
Check your network product documentation for details.
Using WPS to Connect to a Network
52
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using WPS to Connect to a Network
If you have a WPS-enabled wireless router or access point, you can use Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) to
connect your product to the network.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Select the home icon, if necessary.
2. Select the network icon.
Note: Icon may look different depending on connection status.
3. Select Router > Start Setup or Change Settings > Push Button Setup (WPS).
4. Follow the instructions on the LCD screen to complete WPS setup.
5. Select the home icon to exit.
You see the Wi-Fi icon on the LCD screen and should be able to connect to your product directly
from your computer or device, and then print. If you are printing from a computer, make sure you
installed the product software from the Epson website.
Note: If you don't see the Wi-Fi icon, restart the access point, move it closer to the printer, and
repeat these steps to try again. If it still does not work, print a network connection report and check
the solution.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Related references
Control Panel
Related tasks
Accessing the Web Config Utility
Printing a Network Status Sheet
You can print a network status sheet to help you determine the causes of any problems you may have
using your product on a network.
Before you begin, make sure paper is loaded in the product.
53
1. Select the Menu icon.
2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Network Status.
You see a screen like this:
3. Select Print Status Sheet > Print.
Examine the settings shown on the network status sheet to diagnose any problems you have.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Related tasks
Printing a Network Connection Report
Printing a Network Connection Report
You can print a network connection report to view solutions to any problems you may have using your
product on a network.
1. Select the Menu icon.
2. Select General Settings > Network Settings.
55
Network Connection Report Codes and Messages
Check the error codes and messages on the network connection report to solve problems you may
encounter with network connections. The tables here list solutions to problems based on the error codes
and messages that may appear on the top of the report.
1 Error code
2 Message
Note: Error codes and messages listed here may not all apply to your product.
Error Codes and Messages
Error code and message Solution
E-1
Confirm that the network cable is
connected and network devices such as
hub, router, or access point are turned on.
Make sure your router, access point, and/or hub are
turned on, and the network cable is securely connected to
your device and to your product.
If you are trying to set up Wi-Fi, remove the network cable
and set up Wi-Fi again. Ethernet and Wi-Fi cannot be
connected at the same time.
56
Error code and message Solution
E-2, E-3, or E-7
No wireless network names (SSID) found.
Confirm that the router/access point is
turned on and the wireless network (SSID)
is set up correctly. Contact your network
administrator for assistance.
No wireless network names (SSID) found.
Confirm that the wireless network name
(SSID) of the PC you wish to connect is set
up correctly. Contact your network
administrator for assistance.
Entered security key/password does not
match the one set for your router/access
point. Confirm security key/password.
Contact your network administrator for
assistance.
Check the following:
• Make sure your router or access point is turned on, and
is correctly connected to your computer or network
device.
• Turn off the router or access point, wait about 10
seconds, and turn it on again.
• Move your product closer to your router or access point,
and remove any obstacles between them. Also move
your product away from devices such as wireless
phones or microwaves.
• Confirm that the SSID shown on the network
connection report matches the label on your router or
access point. Also make sure your SSID uses only
ASCII characters and symbols, or your product cannot
display the SSID correctly.
• If you are trying to connect using the WPS push button
method, make sure your router or access point supports
it.
• If you are using a network password, check the label on
your router or access point to confirm that you are using
the correct password, or check with your network
administrator or router/access point documentation.
• If you are connecting to a smart device that generates
an SSID, check the device documentation for the SSID
and password you should use.
• If your wireless connection suddenly disconnects, and
another smart device was added to the network using a
WPS push button method or your network was set up
using a non-WPS push button method, try downloading
and installing your product software again.
57
Error code and message Solution
E-5
Security mode (e.g. WEP, WPA) does not
match the current setting of the printer.
Confirm security mode. Contact your
network administrator for assistance.
If the security on your router or access point is not one of
the following types, change the type of security on your
router or access point and reset your product's network
settings.
E-6
MAC address of your printer may be
filtered. Check whether your router/access
point has restrictions such as MAC address
filtering. See the documentation of the
router/access point or contact your network
administrator for assistance.
If your router or access point has MAC address filtering
enabled, register your product's MAC address so it is not
filtered. Locate the MAC address on the network
connection report and check your router or access point
documentation for instructions.
If your router or access point is using shared
authentication with WEP security, confirm that you are
using the correct authentication key and index.
If your router or access point limits the number of
connected devices, raise the connection limit. See your
router or access point documentation for instructions.
E-8
Incorrect IP address is assigned to the
printer. Confirm IP address setup of the
network device (hub, router, or access
point). Contact your network administrator
for assistance.
If your product's Obtain IP Address setting is set to Auto,
enable DHCP on your router or access point. If it is set to
Manual, the IP address may be out of range or on a
different network segment; set a valid IP address using
your product control panel or the Web Config utility.
You can also try turning off your product and the router or
access point, waiting about 10 seconds, and turning them
on again.
E-9
Confirm the connection and network setup
of the PC or other device. Connection using
the EpsonNet Setup is available. Contact
your network administrator for assistance.
Make sure your computer or network device are turned
on. Also make sure that you can access the Internet and
other devices on the same network from the devices you
are trying to connect to your product.
If you still cannot connect to your product, turn off your
router or access point, wait about 10 seconds, and turn it
on again. Download and install your product software
again to reset your network settings.
58
Error code and message Solution
E-10
Confirm IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway setup. Connection using
the EpsonNet Setup is available. Contact
your network administrator for assistance.
Make sure other devices on the network are turned on and
do the following:
• If your product's Obtain IP Address setting is set to
Manual, check the IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway addresses on the network connection
report to see if they are correct. If not, correct the
settings.
• If DHCP is enabled, set your product's Obtain IP
Address setting to Auto. If you want to use the DHCP-
assigned address as a static address, set the Obtain IP
Address setting to Manual, enter the product's IP
address as listed on the network connection report, and
set the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.
If you still cannot connect to your product, turn off your
router or access point, wait about 10 seconds, and turn it
on again.
E-11
Setup is incomplete. Confirm default
gateway setup. Connection using the
EpsonNet Setup is available. Contact your
network administrator for assistance.
If you set your product's TCP/IP Setup setting to Manual,
check that the default gateway address listed on the
network connection report is correct. Also turn on the
device that is set as the default gateway.
59
Error code and message Solution
E-12
Confirm the following:
-Entered security key/password is correct
-Index of the security key/password is set to
the first number
-IP address, subnet mask, or default
gateway setup is correct
Contact your network administrator for
assistance.
Make sure other devices on the network are turned on and
do the following:
• Make sure the IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway addresses are correct, if you are entering them
manually.
• Confirm that the subnet mask and default gateway
addresses for other devices are the same.
• Make sure the IP address does not conflict with other
devices.
If you still cannot connect to your product, do the
following:
• Turn off your router or access point, wait about 10
seconds, and turn it on again.
• Download and install your product software again to
reset your network settings.
• If your router or access point uses WEP security with
several registered passwords, make sure that the first
registered password is set on your product.
E-13
Confirm the following:
-Entered security key/password is correct
-Index of the security key/password is set to
the first number
-Connection and network setup of the PC
or other device is correct
Contact your network administrator for
assistance.
Make sure your router, access point, and/or hub are
turned on. Also make sure the TCP/IP setup on your
router, access point, and/or hub is not set manually; this
may cause your product's network settings to differ from
the manually set up devices.
If you still cannot connect to your product, do the
following:
• Turn off your router or access point, wait about 10
seconds, and turn it on again.
• Download and install your product software again to
reset your network settings.
• If your router or access point uses WEP security with
several registered passwords, make sure that the first
registered password is set on your product.
60
Network Environment Messages
Message Solution
The Wi-Fi environment needs to be
improved. Turn the wireless router off and
then turn it on. If the connection does not
improve, see the documentation for the
wireless router.
Move your product closer to your router or access point,
and remove any obstacles between them. Then turn off
your router or access point, wait about 10 seconds, and
turn it back on again. If you still cannot connect to your
product, check the documentation that came with your
router or access point for solutions.
*No more devices can be connected.
Disconnect one of the connected devices if
you want to add another one.
You can connect up to 4 computers or other devices to
your product using a Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection.
If you want to add another device, disconnect an existing
connected device first.
The same SSID as Wi-Fi Direct exists in
the environment. Change the Wi-Fi Direct
SSID if you cannot connect a smart device
to the printer.
Change the Wi-Fi Direct SSID.
Parent topic: Printing a Network Connection Report
Related tasks
Accessing the Web Config Utility
Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel
Changing or Updating Network Connections
See these sections to change or update how your product connects to a network.
Note: See the online Administrator's Guide for detailed information.
Accessing the Web Config Utility
Changing a USB Connection to a Wi-Fi Connection
Changing a Wi-Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection
Connecting to a New Wi-Fi Router
Disabling Wi-Fi Features
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
61
Accessing the Web Config Utility
You can select your product's network settings and confirm its operating status using a web browser.
You do this by accessing your product's built-in Web Config utility from a computer or other device that is
connected to the same network as your product.
Note: You can also access the Web Config utility from the product information area in the Epson Smart
Panel app. For more information on the Web Config utility, see the online Administrator's Guide.
1. Print a network status sheet.
2. Locate the IP address for your product that is listed on the network status sheet.
3. On a computer or other device connected to the same network as your product, open a web
browser.
4. Enter your product's IP address into the address bar and press Enter.
You see the available Web Config utility options.
Note: The administrator password is required to access the full capabilities of the Web Config utility.
The default password is the product's serial number. Check the label on your product to locate the
serial number.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections
Related tasks
Printing a Network Status Sheet
Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel
Changing a USB Connection to a Wi-Fi Connection
If you have already connected your product to your computer using a USB connection, you can change
to a Wi-Fi connection.
1. Disconnect the USB cable from your product.
2. Uninstall your product software.
3. Download and install your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the
Start Here sheet.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections
62
Related concepts
Uninstall Your Product Software
Changing a Wi-Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection
If you have already connected your product to your computer wirelessly, you can change to a wired
network connection if necessary.
1. Select the home icon, if necessary.
2. Select the network icon.
Note: Icon may look different depending on connection status.
3. Select Description.
You see a screen like this:
4. Select Wired LAN Connection Method > Start Setup.
The Wi-Fi connection is disabled. Select OK.
5. Connect one end of an Ethernet network cable to the product's LAN port.
6. Connect the other end to any available LAN port on your router or access point.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections
Related references
Product Parts - Back
63
Control Panel
Connecting to a New Wi-Fi Router
If you change the wireless router you have been using on your network, you need to update your
product's Wi-Fi connection to the new router.
Note for Latin America: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band
(2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and
5 GHz band, give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and
Home Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for
instructions.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows: Uninstall your product software.
• Mac: Go to the next step.
2. Download and install your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the
Start Here sheet.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections
Related concepts
Uninstall Your Product Software
Disabling Wi-Fi Features
You may need to disable your product's Wi-Fi features if you change your network connection type or
need to solve a problem with your network connection.
Note: Before disabling Wi-Fi features, make a note of your product's SSID (network name) and
password.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Select the home icon, if necessary.
2. Select the network icon.
Note: Icon may look different depending on connection status.
65
Media Handling
See these sections to load and handle media on your product.
Note: The illustrations in this section show a dual roll model, but the instructions are the same for single
roll models unless noted otherwise.
Media Handling Precautions
Roll Paper Handling
Cut Sheet Handling
Creating Custom Paper Settings
Paper Feed Adjustment
About Auto Take-up (Dual Roll Models Only)
Available Epson Papers
Borderless Paper Type Compatibility
Supported Paper Widths
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
Media Handling Precautions
Follow these guidelines as you load media in your product and remove printed media:
• Maintain a constant room temperature when using Epson special media; optimal conditions are
between 59 °F (15 °C) and 77 °F (25 °C), with 40 to 60% humidity. Changes in temperature and
humidity may cause paper to become wavy or curled.
• Avoid touching the printable surface of the paper with your bare hands; moisture and oils from your
hands can affect print quality.
• Do not rub your hands along the edges of the media; the sharp edges could cut you. Wear cotton
gloves when handling media, if possible.
• Media is very heavy, so use at least two people to carry the rolls.
• Do not fold the media or otherwise damage its printable surface; do not get the media wet.
66
• Do not place unwrapped media directly on the floor or press it against your clothing to avoid damaging
the media surface. Make sure media is clean from debris and dust before loading.
• Load media just before printing on it to avoid creases from the pressure rollers; creases may cause
jams or cause the media to rub against the print head. Remove roll paper that is not in use from the
printer; if roll paper is left in the printer for a long period of time, paper quality may decline.
• Do not load media if the edges are uneven on the roll; this could cause feeding problems. Rewind the
media on the roll or use a different roll.
• Place unused media in its original packaging for storage. Keep the media dry and avoid storage
locations that are subject to direct sunlight, excessive heat, or high humidity. Store cut sheets flat to
prevent curling.
• Do not use media that is too thick, too thin, wrinkled, torn, creased, or curled. Flatten the paper before
use by bending it in the opposite direction. For roll paper, cut off any damaged ends and reload the
roll. For cut sheets, use new paper.
• Make sure to remove any protective tape from the media before loading, otherwise paper jams could
occur.
• Dry printed media completely before folding or stacking it. Do not touch, rub, or scratch the printed
surface, otherwise you may damage the print.
67
• Do not place prints in an album before they are completely dry, otherwise you may blur the ink.
• Do not use a dryer to dry the prints.
• Display and store printed media as instructed in the media documentation.
• Typically, prints and photos can fade over time due to the effects of light and various environmental
factors. This also applies to Epson special media, however, the degree of color distortion can be
minimized by following proper storage procedures. See the documentation supplied with Epson
special media for detailed information on handling the paper after printing.
Note: The colors of photos, posters, and other printed materials may appear different under different
lighting conditions.
Parent topic: Media Handling
Roll Paper Handling
Follow the instructions in these sections to load, cut, and remove roll paper in your product.
Note: Some menu options may differ slightly depending on your model, but the procedures are the same
unless noted otherwise.
Loading Roll 1/Roll Paper
Loading Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Cutting Roll Paper
Removing Roll 1/ Roll Paper
Removing Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Parent topic: Media Handling
Loading Roll 1/Roll Paper
You can load roll paper with a 2- or 3-inch core and a compatible width (see the link below). Load roll
paper onto the spindle before loading the roll paper in the printer.
Note: On single roll models (SureColor P6570E/T3770E), Roll 1 appears as Roll on the LCD screen.
The images in this section show a dual roll model, but the instructions are the same unless otherwise
noted.
1. Remove any tape and protective paper from the end of the roll. Make sure the paper is cut straight
across to avoid paper feeding problems.
68
2. Make sure Load paper is displayed on the home screen.
Note: When roll paper is not loaded, - - - is displayed.
3. Select - - - > Roll 1 or Roll > OK.
4. Lift up the paper support lock lever, then move the paper support down to position A (the lowest
position) as shown.
69
Note: Close the paper output flap if it is open.
5. Pull up the lock lever on the roll paper holder.
Note: Make sure you pull the lock lever all the way up to unlock it completely.
70
6. Remove the spindle.
7. Remove the transparent paper stop from the spindle.
71
8. Do one of the following:
• 2-inch roll core: If installed, remove the core adapters from both paper stops. Push the two tabs
on each paper stop to remove the adapter.
72
• 3-inch core: Install the core adapters on both paper stops. Align the triangle marks on the paper
stop with the triangle marks on the adapter and push the adapter in until the tabs are secured.
9. Insert the spindle into the roll paper core as shown, with the leading edge of the roll paper facing
towards you. Push the fixed paper stop against the roll paper until there is no gap between the paper
stop and the roll paper.
73
10. Attach the transparent paper stop to the spindle and press it in until there is no gap between the
paper stop and the roll paper.
11. Make sure both paper stops are flush against the roll paper.
12. Place the spindle into the grooves on the printer with the black paper stop on the right.
74
13. Push down the lock lever on the roll paper holder to lock it in place.
14. On the LCD screen, select > Paper Setting > Roll 1 or Roll > Paper Type and select the paper
type that matches the loaded paper.
Note: It is important to select the correct media type for each loaded media. Most Epson media will
be loaded with the driver installation. If the paper type is not displayed on the control panel or in the
printer driver, you can create a custom paper setting using the control panel, Epson Media Installer,
or Epson Edge Print. (For details on how to use Epson Edge Print, see the help information in the
software.)
For non-Epson media, consult the manufacturer's website for appropriate media types. If you do not
select settings within 90 seconds, the printer uses the displayed settings automatically.
15. To track the amount of paper remaining on the roll (recommended), do the following:
• Select Roll 1 or Roll > Paper Remaining and set Remaining Amount Management to On.
• Select Remaining Amount and enter the length of the roll paper.
• If you want to be notified when paper is low, select Remaining Alert and enter an amount.
Note: When you enable Remaining Amount Management, the printer prints a barcode on the
leading edge of the roll when you remove the roll paper. When you reload the paper, the printer
reads the barcode and automatically sets the paper type and amount remaining.
75
16. Select Advanced Paper Settings and set any additional settings, if necessary.
17. Select OK when you are finished.
The paper will automatically feed into the printer.
18. If Roll Paper Setup > Auto Loading > Off is selected in the Printer Settings menu, or if the roll
paper doesn't feed automatically, do the following to manually feed the paper:
• Gently turn the paper roll and guide the leading edge of the paper into the paper feed slot. Make
sure the roll paper is taut and the leading edge is not folded.
76
• Insert the leading edge of the paper into the paper feed slot until you hear a sound.
19. A message appears on the LCD screen when your printer is ready to print.
77
20. Pull out the paper basket, if necessary.
You can stack one sheet at a time in the paper basket. When printing multiple sheets, remove the
ejected paper so that printouts do not accumulate in the basket.
Note: If you are printing banners or other media larger than can fit in the paper basket, do not pull
out the paper basket. Hold the ejected paper in both hands and support it so that the paper does not
touch the floor.
Parent topic: Roll Paper Handling
Related references
Roll Paper Options - Windows
Paper Setting Menu
Paper Specifications
Available Epson Papers
Supported Paper Widths
Related tasks
Removing Roll 1/ Roll Paper
Selecting Advanced Settings - Mac
78
Creating Custom Paper Settings Using Epson Media Installer
Loading Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
You can load roll paper with a 2- or 3-inch core and a compatible width (see the link below). Load roll
paper onto the spindle before loading the roll paper in the printer.
Note: Roll 2 is not available on SureColor P6570E/T3770E.
1. Remove any tape and protective paper from the end of the roll. Make sure the paper is cut straight
across to avoid paper feeding problems.
2. Make sure Load paper is displayed on the home screen.
Note: When roll paper is not loaded, - - - is displayed.
3. Select - - - > Roll 2 > OK.
79
4. Lift up to release the paper output tray, then gently pull the tray open and place it into position A (the
lowest position) as shown.
80
Note: Close the paper output flap if it is open.
5. Pull up the lock lever on the roll paper holder.
Note: Make sure you pull the lock lever all the way up to unlock it completely.
81
6. Pull out the Roll 2 unit.
7. Remove the spindle.
8. Remove the transparent paper stop from the spindle.
82
9. Do one of the following:
• 2-inch roll core: If installed, remove the core adapters from both paper stops. Push the two tabs
on each paper stop to remove the adapter.
83
• 3-inch core: Install the core adapters on both paper stops. Align the triangle marks on the paper
stop with the triangle marks on the adapter and push the adapter in until the tabs are secured.
10. Insert the spindle into the roll paper core as shown, with the leading edge of the roll paper facing
towards you. Push the fixed paper stop against the roll paper until there is no gap between the paper
stop and the roll paper.
84
11. Attach the transparent paper stop to the spindle and press it in until there is no gap between the
paper stop and the roll paper.
12. Make sure both paper stops are flush against the roll paper.
85
13. Place the spindle into the grooves on the Roll 2 unit with the black end of the spindle on the right,
then push the Roll 2 unit in.
86
14. Push down the lock lever on the roll paper holder to lock it in place.
15. On the LCD screen, select > Paper Setting > Roll 2 > Paper Type and select the paper type
that matches the loaded paper.
Note: It is important to select the correct media type for each loaded media. Most Epson media will
be loaded with the driver installation. If the paper type is not displayed on the control panel or in the
printer driver, you can create a custom paper setting using the control panel, Epson Media Installer,
or Epson Edge Print. (For details on how to use Epson Edge Print, see the Epson Edge Print
manual.)
For non-Epson media, consult the manufacturer's website for appropriate media types. If the roll
paper has a barcode printed on it, the printer reads it and automatically loads the correct settings. If
you do not select settings within 90 seconds, the printer uses the displayed settings automatically.
16. To track the amount of paper remaining on the roll (recommended), do the following:
• Select Roll 1 > Paper Remaining and set Remaining Amount Management to On.
• Select Remaining Amount and enter the length of the roll paper.
87
• If you want to be notified when paper is low, select Remaining Alert and enter an amount.
Note: When you enable Remaining Amount Management, the printer prints a barcode on the
leading edge of the roll when you remove the roll paper. When you reload the paper, the printer
reads the barcode and automatically sets the paper type and amount remaining.
17. Select Advanced Paper Settings and set any additional settings, if necessary.
18. Select OK when you are finished.
The paper will automatically feed into the printer.
19. If Roll Paper Setup > Auto Loading > Off is selected in the Printer Settings menu, or if the roll
paper doesn't feed automatically, do the following to manually feed the paper:
• Gently turn the paper roll and guide the leading edge of the paper into the paper feed slot. Make
sure the roll paper is taut and the leading edge is not folded.
88
• Insert the leading edge of the paper into the paper feed slot until you hear a sound.
20. A message appears on the LCD screen when your printer is ready to print.
89
21. Pull out the paper basket, if necessary.
You can stack one sheet at a time in the paper basket. When printing multiple sheets, remove the
ejected paper so that printouts do not accumulate in the basket.
Note: If you are printing banners or other media larger than can fit in the paper basket, do not pull
out the paper basket. Hold the ejected paper in both hands and support it so that the paper does not
touch the floor.
Parent topic: Roll Paper Handling
Related references
Roll Paper Options - Windows
Paper Setting Menu
Paper Specifications
Available Epson Papers
Supported Paper Widths
Related tasks
Removing Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Selecting Advanced Settings - Mac
90
Creating Custom Paper Settings Using Epson Media Installer
Cutting Roll Paper
The printer has a built-in cutter that can automatically cut most paper types or you can cut your prints
manually. When Auto Cut is turned on, paper is automatically cut after each page prints, or if the roll
paper leading edge is not straight.
To switch between automatic or manual cutting methods, select > General Settings > Printer
Settings > Paper Source Settings > Roll Paper Setup > Cut Settings > Auto Cut on the control panel
or adjust the auto cut settings in the printer driver. The setting selected in the printer driver overrides the
control panel setting.
Caution: Do not use the built-in cutter with these paper types or you may damage or dull the blade:
• Fine art paper
• Canvas
• Vinyl
• Matte poster board
• Adhesive paper
• Banner media
When you print on these paper types, you need to disable the Auto Cut setting and cut the print
manually. You can print cutting guidelines to help you.
Cutting Roll Paper Manually
Printing Cutting Guidelines
Parent topic: Roll Paper Handling
Related references
Roll Paper Options - Windows
Related tasks
Selecting Advanced Settings - Mac
Removing the Auto Take-up Media
Cutting Roll Paper Manually
You can disable the Auto Cut option to keep your prints on the roll until you manually cut them using the
built-in cutter.
91
1. Turn off the Auto Cut setting in the printer driver or the control panel, depending on the situation:
• If you want to cut the paper manually, turn off the setting in the printer driver. Select Advanced >
Roll Paper Option > Auto Cut.
Note: The Auto Cut setting in the printer driver takes priority over the setting in the control panel.
The printer driver setting returns to automatic cutting when you close the application.
• If you are using a paper type that cannot be cut with the built-in cutter, turn off the setting in the
control panel. From the roll paper information area, select Advanced Paper Settings > Auto Cut
> Off.
2. Print your document.
3. Select > Paper Setting > paper source > Feed/Cut Paper.
4. To move the paper into a cutting position, press and hold Forward or Backward until the cut
location reaches the cutting position labeled on the printer.
5. Cut the paper, depending on the situation:
• If the auto cut setting is turned off only in the printer driver, the paper is cut and the paper leading
edge returns to the print wait position.
• If the auto cut setting is turned off in the control panel, select Cut to manually cut the paper with
scissors or select Print Cutting Guideline to print a line on the paper to guide with manual
cutting.
Note: If the paper cannot be cut by the built-in cutter, select Forward until your print is clear of the
printer, then cut the print by hand.
Parent topic: Cutting Roll Paper
Printing Cutting Guidelines
When you disable the Auto Cut setting, you can print a cutting guideline between print jobs as a guide for
manual cutting.
1. Select > General Settings > Printer Settings > Paper Source Settings > Roll Paper Setup >
Cut Settings.
2. Turn off the Auto Cut setting.
3. Select Print Cutting Guideline > On to print cut lines on roll paper.
Note: Cut guidelines are not available when printing on cut sheets or poster board.
92
Parent topic: Cutting Roll Paper
Removing Roll 1/ Roll Paper
When you finish printing on roll paper, remove it from the printer to avoid indenting or creasing the paper.
Note: On single roll models (SureColor P6570E/T3770E), Roll 1 appears as Roll on the LCD screen.
The images in this section show a dual roll model, but the instructions are the same unless otherwise
noted.
Note: If you enabled Remaining Amount Management, the printer prints a barcode on the leading
edge of the roll when you remove the roll paper. When you reload the paper, the printer reads the
barcode and automatically sets the paper type and amount remaining.
1. Store the paper basket, if necessary.
93
2. On the LCD screen, select > Paper Setting > Roll 1 or Roll > Remove.
Note: You can also eject the roll paper by pressing the Roll 1 release button.
The printer rewinds the roll paper.
Note: If printed paper is not cut and remains loaded in the printer, select > Paper Setting > Roll
1 or Roll > Feed/Cut Paper and adjust the cutting position to cut the roll paper.
94
3. Pull up the lock lever on the roll paper holder to release it.
Note: Make sure you pull the lock lever all the way up to unlock it completely.
4. Lift the roll paper out of the printer to remove it.
95
5. Remove the transparent paper stop from the spindle.
6. Remove the spindle from the roll paper.
7. Reattach the transparent paper stop to the spindle.
8. Place the spindle into the grooves on the printer with the black end of the spindle on the right.
96
9. Push down the lock lever on the roll paper holder to lock it in place.
10. Rewind the paper carefully and place it in its original package.
Note: Store roll paper on its end or horizontally (if the packaging end-caps are installed). Never store
roll paper on its edge, as a flat spot can develop and lead to imaging artifacts on the prints. Do not
store roll paper in dusty areas. Print head maintenance and cleanings increase if dust accumulates
on the paper.
Parent topic: Roll Paper Handling
Removing Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
When you finish printing on roll paper, remove it from the printer to avoid indenting or creasing the paper.
Note: Roll 2 is not available for SureColor P6570E/T3770E.
97
Caution: Do not pull out the Roll 2 unit while the paper is loaded. Otherwise, the paper may wrinkle
when you slide the Roll 2 unit back in. When reinstalling the Roll 2 unit, slowly slide it in while taking-up
the paper by hand.
1. Store the paper basket, if necessary.
98
2. On the LCD screen, select > Paper Setting > Roll 2 > Remove.
Note: You can also eject the roll paper by pressing the Roll 2 release button.
The printer rewinds the roll paper.
Note: If printed paper is not cut and remains loaded in the printer, select > Paper Setting > Roll
2 > Feed/Cut Paper and adjust the cutting position to cut the roll paper.
99
3. Pull up the lock lever on the roll paper holder to release it.
Note: Make sure you pull the lock lever all the way up to unlock it completely.
4. Pull out the Roll 2 unit.
100
5. Lift the roll paper up to remove it.
6. Remove the transparent paper stop from the spindle.
7. Remove the spindle from the roll paper.
8. Reattach the transparent paper stop to the spindle.
101
9. Place the spindle into the grooves on the Roll 2 unit with the black end of the spindle on the right,
then push the Roll 2 unit in.
102
10. Push down the lock lever on the roll paper holder to lock it in place.
11. Rewind the paper carefully and place it in its original package.
Note: Store roll paper on its end or horizontally (if the packaging end-caps are installed). Never store
roll paper on its edge, as a flat spot can develop and lead to imaging artifacts on the prints. Do not
store roll paper in dusty areas. Print head maintenance and cleanings increase if dust accumulates
on the paper.
Parent topic: Roll Paper Handling
Cut Sheet Handling
You can load a variety of types and sizes of cut sheet paper in your product.
Loading Cut Sheets
Loading Poster Board
Parent topic: Media Handling
Loading Cut Sheets
You can feed cut sheets from the front or the back of the printer. In both cases, the paper is ejected from
the front after printing.
103
Set the paper feed location from the LCD screen before printing. Select > General Settings >
Printer Settings > Paper Source Settings > Cut Sheet/Poster Board Slot, and select Front or Back.
You can load most photo and fine art sheet papers up to .03 inches (0.8 mm) thick.
Note: Remove any loaded paper, including roll paper, before you load cut sheet paper or poster board.
Make sure there is enough space at the back of the printer.
1. Select the paper information area on the LCD screen.
2. Select Cut Sheet > OK.
104
3. Lift up the paper support lock lever to release the paper support, then set the paper support to
position B (the middle position) as shown.
105
Note: Close the paper output flap if it is open.
106
4. Do one of the following:
• Feeding from the back of the printer: Align the left edge of the paper with the vertical line on the
left side of the rear paper feed slot. Make sure the printable side of the paper is facing up.
107
Feed the paper straight into the printer as shown.
108
• Feeding from the front of the printer: Align the right edge of the paper with the right side of the
front paper feed slot. Make sure the printable side is facing up.
109
When using cut sheets with a paper length of 11.69 inches (297 mm) or longer: Insert the
paper straight into the printer until the trailing edge is above the loading mark on the roll paper
cover (the top edge of the ruler).
110
Note: Make sure the paper passes under the internal rollers as shown.
When using cut sheets with a paper length shorter than 11.69 inches (297 mm): Insert the
paper past the alignment mark, making sure that it passes under the internal rollers.
111
5. On the LCD screen, select the paper size that matches the loaded paper. If the loaded paper does
not match the paper size displayed on the screen, select Paper Size to set the correct size.
Note: Store cut sheet media flat in its original packaging. Storing sheet media unprotected or on its
long or short edge can lead to excess paper curl and cause damage to the printer and ruined prints.
6. Select Advanced Paper Settings and set any additional settings, if necessary.
7. Select OK on the LCD screen.
8. A message appears on the LCD screen when your printer is ready to print.
9. Pull out the paper basket, if necessary.
Note: If you are printing on media larger than can fit in the paper basket, do not pull out the paper
basket.
10. To remove a cut sheet from the printer, select > Paper Setting > Cut Sheet > Remove.
112
11. Support the ejected paper so that the paper does not touch the floor, then select OK.
Parent topic: Cut Sheet Handling
Related references
Paper Specifications
Paper Setting Menu
Available Epson Papers
Related tasks
Removing Roll 1/ Roll Paper
Removing Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Creating Custom Paper Settings Using Epson Media Installer
Loading Poster Board
You can feed poster board from the front or the back of the printer. In both cases, the poster board is
ejected from the front after printing.
113
Set the paper feed location from the LCD screen before printing. Select > General Settings >
Printer Settings > Paper Source Settings > Cut Sheet/Poster Board Slot, and select Front or Back.
Load poster board in portrait orientation (short edge first), otherwise print quality may decline. You can
load poster board up to .06 inches (1.5 mm) thick.
Note: Remove any loaded paper, including roll paper, before you load cut sheet paper or poster board.
Make sure there is enough space at the back of the printer.
1. Select the paper information area on the LCD screen.
2. Select Poster Board > OK.
114
3. Lift up the paper support lock lever to release the paper support, then set the paper support to
position B (the middle position) as shown.
115
Note: Close the paper output flap if it is open.
116
4. Do one of the following:
• Feeding from the back of the printer: Align the left edge of the poster board with the vertical line
on the left side of the rear paper feed slot. Make sure the printable side is facing up.
117
Feed the poster board straight into the printer as shown.
118
• Feeding from the front of the printer: Align the right edge of the poster board with the right side
of the front paper feed slot. Make sure the printable side is facing up.
119
Insert the poster board straight into the printer until the trailing edge is above the loading mark on
the roll paper cover (the top edge of the ruler).
120
Note: Make sure the poster board passes under the internal rollers as shown.
5. On the LCD screen, select the paper size that matches the loaded paper. If the loaded paper does
not match the paper size displayed on the screen, select Paper Size to set the correct size.
Note: Store cut sheet media flat in its original packaging. Storing sheet media unprotected or on its
long or short edge can lead to excess paper curl and cause damage to the printer and ruined prints.
6. Select Advanced Paper Settings and set any additional settings, if necessary.
7. Select OK on the LCD screen.
8. A message appears on the LCD screen when your printer is ready to print.
121
9. When loading poster board that is 23.6 inches (600 mm) or longer, pull out the paper basket.
The basket can be used as a support to prevent the poster board from bending during printing.
122
10. To remove a poster board from the printer, select > Paper Setting > Poster Board > Remove.
11. Support the ejected poster board with both hands so that it does not touch the floor, then select OK.
Parent topic: Cut Sheet Handling
Related references
Paper Specifications
Available Epson Papers
Related tasks
Removing Roll 1/ Roll Paper
Removing Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Creating Custom Paper Settings Using Epson Media Installer
Creating Custom Paper Settings
You can create and store up to 30 custom paper settings for use in printing on non-Epson paper or paper
that is not supported by the Epson printer driver.
123
1. Load the type of paper that you want to configure in the printer.
2. Select > General Settings > Printer Settings > Custom Paper Setting.
3. Select a number for the custom paper setting.
Note: You cannot change paper setting information registered using the printer driver or other
software using the LCD screen.
4. Select Change Reference Paper.
5. Select a paper preset that is similar to the paper that you loaded following these guidelines:
• Photo paper: Baryta
• Fine art paper: Fine Art Matte
• Canvas: Canvas Satin or Canvas Matte
• Plain paper: Plain Paper
• Glossy paper: Photo Paper
• Thick, non-glossy paper: Matte Paper
• Thin, soft, non-glossy paper: Plain Paper
• Canvas-like paper: Canvas
• Cotton paper with a rough surface: Fine Art Paper
• Special media such as film, cloth, poster board, or tracing paper: Others
6. Select Advanced Paper Settings and enter a value for the following settings:
• Paper Thickness (check the manual supplied with the paper)
• Roll Core Diameter (roll paper only)
• Paper Feed Offset (leave at 0 unless you see horizontal banding)
Note: The Paper Feed Offset setting allows you to adjust the difference between the data size and
the print size. For example, if you are printing at a data size of 3.9 inches (100 mm) and a print
size of 4 inches (101 mm), the offset is 1.0%. Therefore, you would enter a value of -1.0%. If you
change even one item set in the Paper menu, you need to perform Paper Feed Offset again.
7. Select any additional settings in the Advanced Paper Settings menu, as necessary.
124
After you create a new custom paper setting, it will appear in the list of available paper types. You should
perform a manual feed adjustment before printing on the custom media.
Note: You can also use Epson Media Installer to import non-Epson media types into the LCD screen.
Selecting Custom Paper Configurations
Creating Custom Paper Settings Using Epson Media Installer
Downloading Epson Media Settings
Parent topic: Media Handling
Related tasks
Optimizing the Media Settings (Automatic Adjustment)
Adjusting the Paper Feed
Selecting Custom Paper Configurations
Once you have created a custom paper configuration, you can select the configuration whenever you
print on the associated media.
1. Select the home icon, if necessary.
2. Select > Paper Setting.
3. Select the paper type you are printing on.
4. Select Change Paper Type or Change Paper Type/Paper Size.
5. Select Paper Type > Others > Custom Paper.
6. Select the custom paper configuration you want to use.
7. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu.
Parent topic: Creating Custom Paper Settings
Creating Custom Paper Settings Using Epson Media Installer
You can use Epson Media Installer to create and store custom paper settings for use in printing on non-
Epson paper or paper that is not supported by the Epson printer driver. You create custom paper
settings by copying an existing paper setting, renaming it, and assigning an ICC profile.
Note: You will need an ICC profile to assign to the paper setting. You cannot change custom paper
settings created through Epson Media Installer using the printer control panel.
125
Note: On Mac, Epson Media Installer requires OS X 10.9.x or later to be installed.
1. Open the Epson Media Installer software.
• Windows: Open the printer driver by right-clicking the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click the printer icon, then selecting Printer
Settings.
Select the Utility tab and click Epson Media Installer.
• Mac: Open the Applications > Epson Software > Epson Utilities folder and double-click Epson
Media Installer.app.
2. Click Media Management, if necessary.
You see a screen like this:
3. Select the paper type you want to use as a base for the new paper setting and click (copy
media).
Note: You can only copy paper types with a Registered status.
A copy of the paper setting is created.
126
4. Select the new paper setting and click (edit).
The Edit Media Settings screen is displayed.
5. Enter a new name and click Browse to load an ICC profile file to use for the paper setting.
6. Click OK and confirm that you want to add the new paper setting to the driver and printer.
Note: The new paper type will be assigned as the next open custom paper setting on the printer.
The new Media Type setting is available in your printer driver and on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer driver is uninstalled, paper types previously added using Epson Media Installer may
not appear when the driver is reinstalled. To re-register the paper information, open Epson Media
Installer, and click Media Management > Refresh.
127
Edit Media Settings Options
Parent topic: Creating Custom Paper Settings
Edit Media Settings Options
You can select the following options on the Edit Media Settings screen.
Setting Description
Media Setting Name Change the media name
Media Type Set a paper category and paper type; the new
media type can be selected in the printer driver
and on the LCD screen
Platen Gap Set the distance between the print head and the
paper; choose a wider setting if prints are
frequently scratched or smudged
Drying Time Set the drying time for each print head pass or for
each page
Roll Tension Adjust the roll tension setting if paper gets wrinkled
during printing
Paper Suction Select to adjust the printer's suction setting;
choose lower values for thinner papers
Skew Reduction Select to reduce paper skew
Paper Thickness Set the thickness of the paper
ICC Profile Set an ICC profile for the media type
Select an RGB Profile when printing using the
printer driver or select an RGB Profile or CMYK
Profile when printing using a software RIP
128
Setting Description
PS unit print settings
(not available on SureColor
P6570DE/P6570E/T3770DE/T3770E)
Select the print settings to use when printing using
the Adobe Embedded Print Engine
If you are printing using the PS Folder, set the Ink
Density (the ink density set in the PS printer driver
is applied otherwise).
For the ICC profile, select Use the same profile
as the printer driver to use the RGB Profile
(make sure to set the RGB Profile in advance) or
Set the profile for PS unit to use the CMYK
Profile.
Roll Core Diameter Select the paper core size for the loaded roll paper
Paper Feed Offset Select the amount of offset necessary to reduce
banding on uneven color in printouts
Paper Size Check Select On to automatically detect the paper width
when paper is loaded.
Select Off when the paper roll is empty. This
allows you to set the paper width before feeding
the paper.
Margins Select the margin for the leading edge of the
printed image. Depending on the paper type and
printing environment, colors may be uneven near
the leading edge if the margin is small.
Parent topic: Creating Custom Paper Settings Using Epson Media Installer
Downloading Epson Media Settings
You can download new or updated media settings for Epson media using the Epson Media Installer
utility.
Note: To install media settings on the printer, you must be connected to the printer.
Note: On Mac, Epson Media Installer requires OS X 10.9.x or later to be installed.
129
1. Open the Epson Media Installer software.
• Windows: Open the printer driver by right-clicking the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click the printer icon, then selecting Printer
Settings.
Select the Utility tab and click Epson Media Installer.
• Mac: Open the Applications > Epson Software > Epson Utilities folder and double-click Epson
Media Installer.
2. Click Media Download, if necessary.
You see a screen like this:
3. Click the name of the media settings you want to download and click Download and Register.
The new settings are available in your printer driver and on the printer control panel.
Parent topic: Creating Custom Paper Settings
Paper Feed Adjustment
If your printouts contain horizontal banding, uneven tint, or stripes, you need to adjust the paper feed.
You do this by printing and examining a test pattern, and then selecting the feed adjustments you need.
130
Adjust the paper feed using the same media type and print conditions you use for printing. For example,
if you are using the auto take-up function, you should use it during feed adjustment. You may need to
adjust the feed again if you load media of a different width, change the feeding or take-up tension, or
adjust the suction.
Before adjusting the feed, make sure you have correctly loaded the media you plan to print on and
selected all the options you plan to use for printing. You should also print a nozzle check pattern to check
for clogged nozzles and clean the print head, if necessary.
Optimizing the Media Settings (Automatic Adjustment)
Adjusting the Paper Feed
Parent topic: Media Handling
Related concepts
Print Head Nozzle Check
Optimizing the Media Settings (Automatic Adjustment)
You can perform an automatic feed adjustment from the product control panel. Make sure the length of
the loaded media is at least 22 inches (558 mm) and the width is 15 inches (388 mm) or wider.
Note: You may not be able to perform automatic adjustment depending on the media you are using. If an
error occurs, or if you notice banding or graininess in the print results even after automatic adjustment,
perform Paper Feed Adjust and Ruled Line Alignment from the Print Adjustments menu.
1. From the home screen, select Paper Setting > paper source > Print Adjustments > Automatic
Adjustment.
2. Select Standard > Auto Adjustment > Start.
An adjustment pattern is printed. View the results and determine if a manual adjustment is
necessary.
Parent topic: Paper Feed Adjustment
Adjusting the Paper Feed
You can adjust the paper feed manually and perform a ruled line alignment from the product control
panel if you can still see banding after performing an automatic feed adjustment. Perform Paper Feed
Adjust and Ruled Line Alignment separately. In both cases, visually inspect the printed pattern and
enter the measurements to perform adjustments.
131
Make sure the length of the loaded media is at least 22 inches (558 mm) and the width is 15 inches (388
mm) or wider. When adjusting using commercially available paper, make sure you register the custom
paper in advance.
1. Select a paper type that matches the paper in the printer.
2. Select > Paper Setting > paper source > Print Adjustments > Paper Feed Adjust from the
control panel.
3. Select the paper feed adjustment that best suits your needs and intended use.
4. If you select manual adjustment, follow the on-screen instructions to make adjustments.
Parent topic: Paper Feed Adjustment
About Auto Take-up (Dual Roll Models Only)
The auto take-up function automatically rolls up printed media as you print. You can use Roll 1 as a take-
up unit for media with the printable side in (on the right) or printable side out (on the left).
Note: Auto take-up is not available on SureColor P6570E/T3770E.
It is best to do the following when using the auto take-up function:
• Cut the end of the roll in a V-shape to allow for easy take-up onto the core.
• Use a take-up roll core that is the same width as your media so the core does not bend or take up
media incorrectly.
Loading Media for Auto Take-up
Removing the Auto Take-up Media
Parent topic: Media Handling
Loading Media for Auto Take-up
Load paper in the Roll 2 unit and set up Roll 1 for auto take-up.
132
Note: Make sure Auto Cut is set to Off when you use the Auto Take-up function.
1. Turn on the printer.
2. Select > General Settings > Printer Settings > Paper Source Settings > Roll Paper Setup >
Roll 1 Function > Take-up.
3. Load roll paper in the Roll 2 unit.
4. Select the paper information area on the LCD screen and select Paper Setting > Roll 2 > Prepare
for Take-up > Proceed.
Note: Select How To... to view the instructions on the LCD screen.
5. Pull up the lock lever on the Roll 1 spindle.
Note: Make sure you pull the lock lever all the way up to unlock it completely.
133
6. Remove the spindle.
7. Remove the transparent paper stop from the spindle.
134
8. Remove the rim of the paper stop from the end of the spindle.
135
9. Do one of the following:
• 2-inch roll core: If installed, remove the core adapters from both paper stops. Push the two tabs
on each paper stop to remove the adapter.
• 3-inch core: Install the core adapters on both paper stops. Align the triangle marks on the paper
stop with the triangle marks on the adapter and push the adapter in until the tabs are secured.
136
10. Insert the spindle into the roll core as shown.
11. Attach the transparent paper stop to the spindle so that the gap between the paper stop and the roll
core is approximately 0.4 inches (10 mm).
137
12. Place the spindle into the grooves on the printer with the black paper stop on the right.
13. Push down the lock lever on the Roll 1 spindle to lock it in place.
138
14. Press the pause/resume button.
15. Use the take-up direction switch to select either printable side in (right) or printable side out (left),
then press the pause/resume button again.
139
16. Lift up the paper support lock lever to release the paper support, then set the paper support to
position A (the lowest position) as shown.
140
17. Open the paper output flap.
141
18. With the paper output flap extended, lift up the paper support lock lever to release the paper support,
then set the paper support to position B (the middle position) as shown.
19. Select the paper information area on the LCD screen and select Feed to Take-up Position to
position the paper so that it can be attached to the take-up roll.
20. Select Backward and Forward to adjust the paper length required for take-up loading.
142
21. Cut the leading edge of the paper as shown.
143
22. Confirm the take-up direction and tape the edge of the media to the center of the core as shown.
• Printable side out
• Printable side in
144
23. Select and hold Forward on the control panel to feed the roll paper about one revolution of the take-
up roll core.
24. Press and hold the Manual take-up button to wind the roll paper once around the roll core.
25. Make sure that there is some slack in the media and that it loads evenly on both sides.
Note: The media will not take up correctly if it is looser on one side than the other.
26. Select Complete when you are finished.
Parent topic: About Auto Take-up (Dual Roll Models Only)
Removing the Auto Take-up Media
Follow these steps to remove the printed take-up media.
1. Select > Paper Setting > Roll 2 > Feed/Cut Paper and adjust the cutting position.
145
2. Cut the media and press the Manual take-up button to roll the cut end onto the take-up roll.
3. Pull up the lock lever on the Roll 1 spindle.
Note: Make sure you pull the lock lever all the way up to unlock it completely.
146
4. Remove the spindle.
5. Remove the transparent paper stop from the spindle.
6. Slide the taken-up media off of the spindle.
147
7. Re-attach the rim of the paper stop to the end of the spindle.
8. Re-attach the transparent paper stop to the spindle.
9. Place the spindle into the grooves on the printer with the black paper stop on the right.
148
10. Push down the lock lever on the Roll 1 spindle to lock it in place.
Parent topic: About Auto Take-up (Dual Roll Models Only)
Available Epson Papers
The following Epson special media is recommended for high-quality printing results.
Note: Supported paper width and embedded media profiles vary by model.
Note: Paper/media availability varies by country.
U.S. and Canada
You can purchase genuine Epson ink, paper, and accessories from an Epson authorized reseller. To
find the nearest reseller, visit proimaging.epson.com (U.S.) or proimaging.epson.ca (Canada), select
your product series and product, and click the Where to Buy button. Or call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-
7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada.
Note: For the most updated list of supported Epson papers, visit proimaging.epson.com (U.S.) or
proimaging.epson.ca (Canada).
Latin America
149
You can purchase genuine Epson ink, paper, and accessories from an Epson authorized reseller. To
find the nearest reseller, visit latin.epson.com or call your nearest Epson sales office.
Note: For the most updated list of supported Epson papers, visit latin.epson.com or call your nearest
Epson sales office.
Roll Paper
Paper Type Size Part number Amount
Epson Cold Press Bright 17 inches (432 mm) × 50 feet
(15.2 m)
S042313 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
S042314 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
1
S042315 1 roll
Epson Cold Press Natural 17 inches (432 mm) × 50 feet
(15.2 m)
S042303 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
S042304 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
1
S042305 1 roll
Epson Hot Press Bright 17 inches (432 mm) × 50 feet
(15.2 m)
S042333 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
S042334 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
1
S042335 1 roll
Epson Hot Press Natural 17 inches (432 mm) × 50 feet
(15.2 m)
S042323 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
S042324 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
1
S042325 1 roll
150
Paper Type Size Part number Amount
Epson Premium Luster Photo
Paper (260)
8.3 inches (211 mm) × 32 feet
(9.8 m)
S041408 1 roll
10 inches (254 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S042077 1 roll
13 inches (330 mm) × 32 feet
(9.8 m)
S041409 1 roll
16 inches (406 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S042079 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S042081 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
2
S042082 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
1
S042083 1 roll
Epson Metallic Photo Paper
Glossy
16 inches (406 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S045585 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S045586 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
2
S045587 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
1
S045588 1 roll
Epson Metallic Photo Paper Luster 16 inches (406 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S045592 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S045593 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
2
S045594 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
1
S045595 1 roll
151
Paper Type Size Part number Amount
Epson Proofing Paper White
Semimatte
13 inches (300 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S042002 1 roll
17 inches (432 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S042003 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S042004 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
2
S042005 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
1
S042006 1 roll
Epson Standard Proofing Paper
Publication
13 inches (300 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S041996 1 roll
17 inches (432 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S041997 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S041998 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
2
S041999 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
1
S042001 1 roll
Epson Standard Proofing Paper
Commercial
13 inches (300 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S042144 1 roll
17 inches (432 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S041997 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S041998 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
2
S041999 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
1
S042001 1 roll
152
Paper Type Size Part number Amount
Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper
Luster
13 inches (330 mm) × 32.8 feet
(10 m)
S041409 1 roll
Epson Exhibition Canvas Matte 13 inches (330 mm) × 20 feet
(6.1 m)
S045255 1 roll
17 inches (432 mm) × 40 feet
(12.2 m)
S045256 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 40 feet
(12.2 m)
S045257 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 40 feet
(12.2 m)
2
S045258 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 40 feet
(12.2 m)
1
S045259 1 roll
Epson Exhibition Canvas Satin 13 inches (330 mm) × 20 feet
(6.1 m)
S045248 1 roll
17 inches (432 mm) × 40 feet
(12.2 m)
S045249 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 40 feet
(12.2 m)
S045250 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 40 feet
(12.2 m)
2
S045251 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 40 feet
(12.2 m)
1
S045252 1 roll
153
Paper Type Size Part number Amount
Epson Exhibition Canvas Gloss 13 inches (330 mm) × 20 feet
(6.1 m)
S045241 1 roll
17 inches (432 mm) × 40 feet
(12.2 m)
S045242 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 40 feet
(12.2 m)
S045243 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 40 feet
(12.2 m)
2
S045244 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 40 feet
(12.2 m)
1
S045245 1 roll
Epson Exhibition Fiber Paper 17 inches (432 mm) × 50 feet
(15.2 m)
S045188 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
S045189 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
1
S045190 1 roll
Epson Premium Glossy Photo
Paper (250)
16 inches (406 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S041742 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S041638 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
2
S041639 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
1
S041640 1 roll
Epson Premium Semigloss Photo
Paper (250)
16 inches (406 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S041743 1 roll
154
Paper Type Size Part number Amount
Epson Premium Semigloss Photo
Paper (170)
24 inches (610 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S041393 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
2
S041394 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
1
S041395 1 roll
Epson Premium Semimatte Photo
Paper (250)
16 inches (406 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S042149 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S042150 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
2
S042151 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
1
S042152 1 roll
Epson Premium Glossy Photo
Paper (170)
16.5 inches (419 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S042076 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S041390 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
2
S041391 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
1
S041392 1 roll
Epson Enhanced Matte Paper 16 inches (406 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S041725 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
S041595 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
2
S041596 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 100 feet
(30.5 m)
1
S041597 1 roll
155
Paper Type Size Part number Amount
Epson Singleweight Matte Paper 17 inches (432 mm) × 132 feet
(40.2 m)
S041746 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 132 feet
(40.2 m)
S041853 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 132 feet
(40.2 m)
2
S041854 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 132 feet
(40.2 m)
1
S041855 1 roll
Epson Doubleweight Matte Paper 24 inches (610 mm) × 82 feet
(25 m)
S041385 1 roll
36 inches (914 mm) × 82 feet
(25 m)
2
S041386 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 82 feet
(25 m)
1
S041387 1 roll
Epson Legacy Platine 17 inches (432 mm) × 50 feet
(15.2 m)
S450076 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
S450077 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
1
S450078 1 roll
Epson Legacy Fibre 17 inches (432 mm) × 50 feet
(15.2 m)
S450082 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
S450083 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
1
S450084 1 roll
156
Paper Type Size Part number Amount
Epson Legacy Etching 17 inches (432 mm) × 50 feet
(15.2 m)
S450088 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
S450089 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
1
S450090 1 roll
Epson Legacy Baryta II 17 inches (432 mm) × 50 feet
(15.2 m)
S450094 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
S450095 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
1
S450096 1 roll
Epson Legacy Textured 17 inches (432 mm) × 50 feet
(15.2 m)
S450311 1 roll
24 inches (610 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
S450312 1 roll
44 inches (1118 mm) × 50 feet
(15.3 m)
1
S450313 1 roll
1
SureColor P8570D/P8570DL/T7770D/T7770DL only
2
SureColor P8570D/P8570DL/T5770D/T7770D/T7770DL only
Cut Sheets
Paper Type Size Part number Sheet Count
Epson Cold Press Bright Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S042307 25
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S042310 25
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S042311 25
157
Paper Type Size Part number Sheet Count
Epson Cold Press Natural Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S042297 25
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S042300 25
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S042301 25
Epson Velvet Fine Art Paper Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041636 20
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S041637 20
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S042097 25
Epson Exhibition Fiber Paper Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S045033 25
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S045037 25
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S045039 25
Epson Hot Press Bright Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S042327 25
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S042330 25
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S042331 25
Epson Hot Press Natural Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S042317 25
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S042320 25
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S042321 25
Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper
Glossy
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S042175 20
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm) S041946 20
Epson Metallic Photo Paper
Glossy
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S045589 25
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S045590 25
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S045591 25
158
Paper Type Size Part number Sheet Count
Epson Metallic Photo Paper Luster Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S045516 25
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S045517 25
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S045598 25
Epson Photo Paper Glossy Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041649 50
11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm) S041156 20
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S041143 20
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041271 100
Epson Premium Photo Paper
Glossy
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041286 20
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm])
S041288 20
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S041289 20
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041667 50
11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm) S041290 20
4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm) S041727 100
5 × 7 inches (127 × 178 mm) S041464 20
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm) S041465 20
11 × 14 inches (279 × 356 mm) S041466 20
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S042092 25
159
Paper Type Size Part number Sheet Count
Epson Premium Photo Paper
Semi-gloss
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041331 20
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S041327 20
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm) S041467 50
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041257 50
11 × 14 inches (279 × 356 mm) S041468 50
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm])
S041260 50
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S041263 50
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S042124 25
Epson Premium Presentation
Paper Matte
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041062 100
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches
[216 × 356 mm])
S041067 100
11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm) S041070
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S041069 100
16.5 × 23.4
inches (420 × 594 mm)
S041079 30
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S041171 100
Epson Proofing Paper White
Semimatte
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S045115 100
Epson Standard Proofing Paper
(240)
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S045115 100
160
Paper Type Size Part number Sheet Count
Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper
Luster
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041405 50
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm])
S041406 50
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S041407 50
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S041604 100
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S042084 25
Epson Ultra Premium Presentation
Paper Matte
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041341 50
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm])
S041343 50
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S041605 100
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S041908 100
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S041339 50
Epson UltraSmooth Fine Art Paper 13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S041896 25
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S041897 25
Epson Watercolor Paper Radiant
White
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S041351 20
Epson Exhibition Canvas Matte 17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S045261 25
Epson Legacy Platine Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S450079 25
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S450080 25
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S450081 25
Epson Legacy Fibre Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S450085 25
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S450086 25
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S450087 25
161
Paper Type Size Part number Sheet Count
Epson Legacy Etching Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S450091 25
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S450092 25
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S450093 25
Epson Legacy Baryta II Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S450097 25
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S450098 25
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S450099 25
Epson Legacy Textured Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S450308 25
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) S450309 25
17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm) S450310 25
Parent topic: Media Handling
Borderless Paper Type Compatibility
You can print borderless photos on compatible paper types in compatible paper widths.
Note: Compatible paper width varies by model.
Borderless Paper Types
• Epson Singleweight Matte Paper
• Epson Doubleweight Matte Paper
• Epson Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
• Epson Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (170)
• Epson Premium Glossy Photo Paper (170)
• Epson Premium Semimatte Photo Paper (250)
• Epson Premium Luster Photo Paper (260)
162
Borderless Paper Widths
• 10 inches (254 mm)
• 11.8 inches (300 mm)
• 13 inches (330 mm)
• 16 inches (406 mm)
• 17 inches (432 mm)
• 19.6 inches (500 mm)
• 20 inches (508 mm)
• 20.3 inches (515 mm)
• 23 inches (594 mm)
• 24 inches (610 mm)
• 27.5 inches (700 mm)
1
• 28.6 inches (728 mm)
1
• 33 inches (841 mm)
1
• 36 inches (914 mm)
1
• 40.5 inches (1030 mm)
2
• 44 inches (1118 mm)
2
1
SureColor P8570D/P8570DL/T5770D/T5770DM/T7770D/T7770DL/T7770DM only
2
SureColor P8570D/P8570DL/T7770D/T7770DL/T7770DM only
Parent topic: Media Handling
Supported Paper Widths
The following paper widths are supported. You can perform right and left borderless printing on paper
sizes that support borderless printing.
SureColor P8570D/P8570DL/T7770D/T7770DL/T7770DM
Paper Width Supported Borderless
44 inches (1118 mm) Supported Supported
42 inches (1067 mm) Supported —
163
Paper Width Supported Borderless
42 inches (1030 mm) Supported Supported
42 inches (1000 mm) Supported —
36 inches (914 mm) Supported Supported
36 inches (900 mm) Supported —
34 inches (864 mm) Supported —
ISO A0 (841 mm) Supported Supported
ISO A0 (800 mm) Supported —
30 inches (762 mm) Supported —
JIS B1/B2 (728 mm) Supported Supported
F (711 mm) — —
ISO B1/B2 (707 mm) Supported —
ISO B1/B2 (700 mm) Supported Supported
27 inches (686 mm) — —
26 inches (660 mm) — —
24 inches (610 mm) Supported Supported
24 inches (600 mm) Supported —
ISO A1/A2 (594 mm) Supported Supported
22 inches (559 mm) Supported —
JIS B2/B3 (515 mm) Supported Supported
20 inches (508 mm) Supported Supported
20 inches (500 mm) Supported Supported
18 inches (457 mm) Supported —
18 inches (450 mm) — —
17 inches (432 mm) Supported Supported
ISO A2/A3 (420 mm) Supported —
16 inches (406 mm) Supported Supported
164
Paper Width Supported Borderless
16 inches (400 mm) Supported —
JIS B3/B4 (364 mm) Supported —
14 inches (356 mm) Supported —
ISO B3 (353 mm) — —
13 inches (330 mm) Supported Supported
12 inches (305 mm) Supported —
12 inches (300 mm) Supported Supported
ISO A3/A4 (297 mm) Supported —
11 inches (279 mm) Supported —
11 inches (257 mm) Supported —
10 inches (254 mm) Supported Supported
Less than 10 inches (254 mm) — —
SureColor T5770D/T5770DM
Paper Width Supported Borderless
44 inches (1118 mm) — —
42 inches (1067 mm) — —
42 inches (1030 mm) — —
42 inches (1000 mm) — —
36 inches (914 mm) Supported Supported
36 inches (900 mm) Supported —
34 inches (864 mm) Supported Supported
ISO A0 (841 mm) Supported Supported
ISO A0 (800 mm) Supported —
30 inches (762 mm) Supported —
JIS B1/B2 (728 mm) Supported Supported
165
Paper Width Supported Borderless
F (711 mm) — —
ISO B1/B2 (707 mm) Supported —
ISO B1/B2 (700 mm) Supported Supported
27 inches (686 mm) — —
26 inches (660 mm) — —
24 inches (610 mm) Supported Supported
24 inches (600 mm) Supported —
ISO A1/A2 (594 mm) Supported Supported
22 inches (559 mm) Supported —
JIS B2/B3 (515 mm) Supported Supported
20 inches (508 mm) Supported Supported
20 inches (500 mm) Supported Supported
18 inches (457 mm) Supported —
18 inches (450 mm) — —
17 inches (432 mm) Supported Supported
ISO A2/A3 (420 mm) Supported —
16 inches (406 mm) Supported Supported
16 inches (400 mm) Supported —
JIS B3/B4 (364 mm) Supported —
14 inches (356 mm) Supported —
ISO B3 (353 mm) — —
13 inches (330 mm) Supported Supported
12 inches (305 mm) Supported —
12 inches (300 mm) Supported Supported
ISO A3/A4 (297 mm) Supported —
11 inches (279 mm) Supported —
166
Paper Width Supported Borderless
11 inches (257 mm) Supported —
10 inches (254 mm) Supported Supported
Less than 10 inches (254 mm) — —
SureColor P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E/T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E
Paper Width Supported Borderless
44 inches (1118 mm) — —
42 inches (1067 mm) — —
42 inches (1030 mm) — —
42 inches (1000 mm) — —
36 inches (914 mm) — —
36 inches (900 mm) — —
34 inches (864 mm) — —
ISO A0 (841 mm) — —
ISO A0 (800 mm) — —
30 inches (762 mm) — —
JIS B1/B2 (728 mm) — —
F (711 mm) — —
ISO B1/B2 (707 mm) — —
ISO B1/B2 (700 mm) — —
27 inches (686 mm) — —
26 inches (660 mm) — —
24 inches (610 mm) Supported Supported
24 inches (600 mm) Supported —
ISO A1/A2 (594 mm) Supported Supported
22 inches (559 mm) Supported —
167
Paper Width Supported Borderless
JIS B2/B3 (515 mm) Supported Supported
20 inches (508 mm) Supported Supported
20 inches (500 mm) Supported Supported
18 inches (457 mm) Supported —
18 inches (450 mm) — —
17 inches (432 mm) Supported Supported
ISO A2/A3 (420 mm) Supported —
16 inches (406 mm) Supported Supported
16 inches (400 mm) Supported —
JIS B3/B4 (364 mm) Supported —
14 inches (356 mm) Supported —
ISO B3 (353 mm) — —
13 inches (330 mm) Supported Supported
12 inches (305 mm) Supported —
12 inches (300 mm) Supported Supported
ISO A3/A4 (297 mm) Supported —
11 inches (279 mm) Supported —
11 inches (257 mm) Supported Supported
10 inches (254 mm) Supported Supported
Less than 10 inches (254 mm) — —
Parent topic: Media Handling
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
For this paper Select this Paper Type or Media Type setting
Plain paper 16 to 20 lb (60 to 75 g/m
2
) Plain Paper
Epson Singleweight Matte Paper Singleweight Matte Paper
168
For this paper Select this Paper Type or Media Type setting
Epson Doubleweight Matte Paper Doubleweight Matte Paper
Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte Enhanced Matte Paper
Archival Matte Paper
Epson High Quality Ink Jet Paper Photo Quality Ink Jet Paper
Epson Premium Glossy Photo Paper (170) Premium Glossy Photo Paper (170)
Epson Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (170) Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (170)
Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy Premium Glossy Photo Paper
Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Semi-gloss Premium Semigloss Photo Paper
Epson Premium Luster Photo Paper (260)
Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper Luster
Premium Luster Photo Paper (260)
Photo paper (generic) Photo Paper (Generic)
Tracing paper/vellum paper Tracing Paper
Tracing Paper <Low Duty>
Matte Film
Enhanced Adhesive Synthetic Paper Enhanced Adhesive Synthetic Paper
Enhanced Low Adhesive Synthetic Paper
Epson Ultra Premium Presentation Paper Matte Ultra Premium Presentation Matte
Epson Presentation Paper Matte Presentation Paper Matte
Epson Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
Epson Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250) Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250)
Epson Exhibition Canvas Satin Canvas Satin
Epson Exhibition Canvas Matte Canvas Matte
Epson Legacy Baryta II Baryta
Polyester banner (generic) Heavy Weight Polyester Banner
169
Note: The settings listed here are available only when printing from your computer; they do not apply to
your product's control panel settings.
Parent topic: Media Handling
Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
You can change the default paper size and paper type for each source using the control panel on the
product.
1. Select the home icon, if necessary.
2. Select > Paper Setting.
3. Select the paper source you want to select settings for from the following options:
• SureColor
P6570D/P6570DE/P8570D/P8570DL/T3770D/T3770DE/T5770D/T5770DM/T7770D/T7770DL/T7
770DM: Roll 1, Roll 2, Cut Sheet, Poster Board
• SureColor P6570E/T3770E: Roll, Cut Sheet, Poster Board
4. Select the following settings depending on your paper source selection:
• Roll 1/Roll/Roll 2:
Select Change Paper Type > Paper Type and select the type of paper you loaded, then select
Paper Width and select the width of the loaded paper.
• Cut Sheet/Poster Board:
Select Change Paper Type/Paper Size > Paper Type and select the type of paper you loaded,
then select Paper Size and select the size of the loaded paper.
5. Select the home icon to exit.
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel
Parent topic: Media Handling
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel
Select a Paper Type setting that matches the paper you loaded. If you do not see your paper type listed,
select Others in the menu.
Paper type loaded Paper Type setting
Plain paper 16 to 20 lb (60 to 75 g/m
2
) Plain Paper
170
Paper type loaded Paper Type setting
Coated paper (generic) Coated Paper (Generic)
Epson Doubleweight Matte Paper Doubleweight Matte
Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy Premium Glossy Sheet
Photo Paper
Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte Matte Paper
Tracing paper/vellum paper CAD
Polyester banner (generic) Heavyweight Polyester
Enhanced Adhesive Synthetic Paper Enhanced Adhesive Syn.
Enhanced Low Adh. Syn.
Parent topic: Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
171
Printing from a Computer
Before printing from your computer, make sure you have set up your product and installed its software
as described on the Start Here sheet.
Note: If you have an Internet connection, it is a good idea to check for updates to your product software
on Epson's support website. If you see a Software Update screen, select Enable automatic checking
and click OK. The update scans your system to see if you have the latest product software. Follow the
on-screen instructions. You can also check for updates using Epson Software Updater in the Epson
software folder on your computer.
Printing with Windows
Printing on a Mac
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing from a Shared Folder
Printing from a Web Browser
Switching the Roll Paper for Printing
Printing with Windows
You can print with your product using any Windows application, as described in these sections.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the
software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows
Store.
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Print Layout Options - Windows
Selecting Advanced Settings - Windows
Selecting Additional Settings - Windows
Saving, Sharing, and Customizing the Printer Settings
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows
Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens
Changing Automatic Update Options
172
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Select the basic settings for the document you want to print.
Note: The available settings and appearance of the print window may differ from those covered here,
depending on the Windows version, application, and printer model you are using.
1. Open a document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. If necessary, select your product name as the printer you want to use.
Note: You may also need to select Preferences, Properties, Print Settings, or Printer Properties
to view your print settings.
173
You see the Printer Settings window:
Note: The appearance of the screen may differ from the one shown depending on your printer
model and driver version.
4. Select the Current Settings option.
5. Click Settings to select the Document Size setting that matches the size of the digital document
you are printing.
Note: The Document Size should be set before selecting an Output Size.
6. If you want your printout to be a different size than the selected document size, select the Output
Size setting. Make sure to select a paper size that is larger than the selected document size or
enlargement setting.
Note: Select Custom Paper Size to set a user-defined output size.
174
7. If you are printing a borderless photo, select Borderless. You can select Amount of Enlargement
to access additional options for borderless printing.
Note: You must select a compatible borderless paper type and size to print without borders. Check
the borderless paper compatibility list for details.
8. Select the Source setting that matches the paper source you want to use.
Note: If you select a roll paper option, select the width of the roll as the Roll Paper Width setting.
9. Select the Media Category setting that matches the paper you loaded.
Note: If you want to use paper settings that have been set in the printer's control panel, select Use
Printer Settings.
Note: Click Acquire Info to refresh the settings if you loaded or changed paper after opening the
print window.
10. Select the Media Type setting that matches the paper you loaded.
Note: Click Acquire Info to refresh the settings if you loaded or changed paper after opening the
print window.
11. Set the print quality.
12. Select Select Target and make the following settings according to your model:
• SureColor T-Series: Select Simple Settings as necessary. When printing in high quality, select
Print with High Quality. To make detailed print quality settings, deselect the Simple Settings
checkbox.
175
• SureColor P-Series: Set the Print Mode, Color Mode, and Level as necessary.
13. To see a preview of how your document will print, select Print Preview. (The preview appears after
you click Print but before printing starts.)
14. To layout multiple print data or images for printing all at once, select Layout Manager.
Paper Source Options - Windows
Print Mode Options - Windows
Color Mode Options - Windows
Using Layout Manager - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Related references
Borderless Paper Type Compatibility
Related tasks
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
Paper Source Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options in the Source menu to print on the paper loaded in that
source.
Roll Auto
Selects the appropriate roll for printing.
Roll 1/Roll
Selects roll paper loaded in Roll 1 (on dual roll models) or Roll (on single roll models).
Roll 2
Selects roll paper loaded in Roll 2 (not available on SureColor P6570E/T3770E).
Cut Sheet
Selects the cut sheet loaded in the paper feeder.
176
Poster Board
Selects the poster board loaded in the paper feeder.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Print Mode Options - Windows
You can select a Print Mode option to determine the color of your printouts.
Note: Options may vary depending on printer model.
Color
Select to print your document in color.
Black
Select to print your document in black and white (grayscale is supported).
Black (Bi-Level)
Select to print CAD drawings in black and white (grayscale is not supported).
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Color Mode Options - Windows
The printer driver automatically adjusts colors to match the color space. You can adjust the Color Mode
setting to fine-tune the colors in your printout or turn off color management in your printer software.
Note: On SureColor T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E/T5770D/T5770DM/T7770D/T7770DL/T7770DM, you
can select the color correction method by deselecting the Simple Settings checkbox.
EPSON Standard (sRGB)
Optimizes the sRGB space.
Adobe RGB
Optimizes the Adobe RGB space.
Business Graphics
Performs color correction to optimize your images based on the sRGB space (SureColor
T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E/T5770D/T5770DM/T7770D/T7770DL/T7770DM only).
Line Drawing
Optimizes color correction for line drawings by processing the border between lines and the
background as discontinuous.
177
ICM
Automatically adjusts colors based on the printer’s ICC profile and the selected Media Type setting,
using the Image Color Matching system. Click the Advanced button to choose the input profile and
other settings.
Note: In most cases, you get better results by applying color management in your application, rather
than in the printer driver.
Off (No Color Adjustment)
Turns off color management in your printer software so you can manage color using only your
application software.
Note: An ICC profile is required if color management is turned off.
Click Settings to open the Color Controls menu, where you can specify values for adjusting brightness,
contrast, saturation, and individual Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow color tones. You can choose from two
Gamma settings, and use either a color circle or slide bar to adjust color.
179
Using Layout Manager - Windows
Layout Manager lets you include multiple pieces of print data created in different applications onto one
sheet of paper for printing.
180
You can also place the same print data multiple times as shown here.
181
You can place print data in different sizes and orientations to maximize media usage, as shown here.
182
You can place print data on roll paper as shown here.
1. Open the file you want to print in your application.
2. Select the print command in your application.
3. Select the Layout Manager checkbox on the Printer Settings tab.
4. Choose an option for the Document Size setting that matches the size of the document in your
application.
5. Click OK and then click Print, if necessary.
The Layout Manager screen opens and displays one page in the layout.
183
6. Leave the Layout Manager screen open and repeat steps 1 to 4 to arrange additional print data. The
pages are added to the Layout Manager screen.
7. Do the following to arrange objects on the Layout Manager screen:
• Drag pages to move and resize them.
• Use the tool buttons and the Object menu to align and rotate pages.
• Resize and replace whole pages in the Preference or Arrangement Settings screens.
Note: See the Layout Manager screen help for details.
8. Click File > Properties and select your print settings, including the size of the paper you are printing
on.
9. Open the File menu on the Layout Manager screen and click Print.
Note: To save the current job to a file, open the File menu on the Layout Manager screen, save the
file, and close the Layout Manager screen. To open the saved file later for editing or reprinting, right-
click the printer icon in the Windows taskbar, click Layout Manager, and select the file.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
184
Selecting Print Layout Options - Windows
You can select a variety of layout options for your document on the Layout tab.
• To select multiple copies and their print order, select the Copies, Collate, and Reverse Order
options.
• To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, or print one image on multiple sheets of paper, select
the Page Layout checkbox and select the option you want.
• To rotate or flip the printed image, select the Rotate 180° or Mirror Image checkbox.
Page Layout Options - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Page Layout Options - Windows
You can select these Page Layout options to set up your multi-page print job.
Note: Available options depend on the Paper Source setting.
185
Folded Double-Side
Prints two consecutive pages on one sheet of paper. The second page is flipped and printed next to
the first page, allowing the sheet to be folded to make a 2-sided document. Click Settings to select a
binding edge option and set margins.
N-up
Prints 2 (2-up) or 4 (4-up) pages on one sheet of paper. Click Settings to choose the number of
pages per sheet and set the page order.
Note: The N-up option is not available when using borderless printing.
Poster
Prints one image on multiple sheets of paper to create a large poster. Click the Settings button to
select the layout and guideline options.
Print Banner
Select when using a Windows application designed for banners.
Parent topic: Selecting Print Layout Options - Windows
186
Selecting Advanced Settings - Windows
You can select advanced printing settings on the Advanced tab.
• To create or edit custom printing settings, select Custom Settings.
• To control how roll paper is cut after printing, select an Auto Cut option. Select other roll paper options
as necessary.
• To adjust the ink saturation level, click Advanced Media Control and adjust the settings as
necessary.
• To print a color background on the page, select the Print Bckg Color checkbox and click Color
Settings to select the color you want to use.
• To print the time, date, and other information about your print job at the top or bottom of the page,
select the Job Settings checkbox and click Details to select the settings you want to use.
Roll Paper Options - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
187
Roll Paper Options - Windows
Select any of the available roll paper options.
Note: Some settings may not be available, depending on the Roll Paper Option you selected for your
paper size.
Auto Cut
• Off: Select this option to cut your prints manually.
• Normal Cut: Creates a margin at the top and bottom of your image and automatically cuts the
paper. These margins vary by media type and may be changed from their defaults using custom
media settings.
• Single Cut: Prints images end-to-end with no gap between them. Borderless images may overlap
slightly.
188
• Double Cut: Increases the space between each image and trims each print individually, providing
the cleanest edge for borderless printing.
Auto Rotate
Automatically positions the image or print data to fit the roll paper.
Print Page Line
Prints lines between pages as a guide for manual cutting.
Save Roll Paper
When Auto Cut is enabled, the printer cuts the roll paper at the end of the image as positioned on the
page.
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Settings - Windows
189
Selecting Additional Settings - Windows
You can run maintenance utilities and select additional settings that apply to all your print jobs on the
Utility tab.
• Click Print Head Nozzle Check to print a nozzle check pattern to check whether the print head
nozzles are clogged.
• Click Print Head Cleaning to clean the print head if you notice banding or gaps in your printouts.
• Click Epson Status Monitor 3 to check the printer's status.
• Click Monitoring Preferences to select the error notifications displayed on the Epson Status Monitor
3 screen, or add a shortcut to the utility in the Windows taskbar.
• Click Print Queue to display a list of all waiting print jobs, view information on the data waiting to be
printed, and delete or reprint the jobs.
• Click Printer and Option Information to view and make settings for the printer and optional devices.
• Click Speed and Progress to select various printing options.
190
• Click Epson Media Installer if the media type you want to use is not displayed on the control panel or
in the driver; you can add media information from the Internet.
• Select a Language option for the language you want to use for the printer software screens.
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Related tasks
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility
Saving, Sharing, and Customizing the Printer Settings
You can save groups of print settings or media settings so you can reuse them for future print jobs. You
can export these settings as a file so you can share them with other users. You can also edit the settings
displayed in the printer software screens.
Saving and Sharing Print Settings - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Saving and Sharing Print Settings - Windows
You can save your print settings so you can use them for future print jobs.
1. Make sure the selected settings on the Printer Settings, Layout, and Advanced tabs are set to what
you want to save.
2. Under the Select Setting drop-down menu, select Custom Settings.
191
You see a window like this:
3. Verify that your settings are correct, enter a name for the group of settings in the Name field, and
click Save.
4. Do the following as necessary:
• If you need to delete a group of settings you have created, select the name of the group of settings
from the list and click Delete.
• To export the settings, select the name of the group of settings, click Export, select a location,
and enter a file name.
• To import a group of settings, click Import, select the file you want to use, and click Open. Then
use the settings to print.
You can save up to 100 settings. Once custom settings are saved, you can select the name of the group
of settings from the Select Setting drop-down menu and use them to print.
Parent topic: Saving, Sharing, and Customizing the Printer Settings
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
192
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
Once you have selected your print settings, you are ready to save your settings and print.
1. Click OK to save your settings.
You see your application's Print window, such as this one:
2. Click OK or Print to start printing.
Checking Print Status - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
193
Checking Print Status - Windows
During printing, you see this window showing the progress of your print job. It allows you to control
printing and check ink cartridge status.
Note: Displayed ink colors may differ depending on printer model.
• To cancel printing, click Cancel.
• To see print jobs waiting to print, click Print Queue.
• To check ink status, click Ink Levels.
Parent topic: Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows
When you change your print settings in a program, the changes apply only while you are printing in that
program session. If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs, you can
select new default print settings.
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
2. Select Printer Settings.
194
You see the printer settings window:
Note: The screen may differ slightly depending on printer model.
3. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs.
4. Click OK.
These settings are now the defaults selected for printing. You can still change them as needed for
printing in any program session.
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens
You can change the language used on the Windows printer software screens.
195
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
2. Select Printer Settings.
You see the printer settings window.
3. Click the Utility tab.
You see these options:
4. Select the language you want to use as the Language setting.
5. Click OK to close the printer software window.
The printer software screens appear in the language you selected the next time you access them.
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
196
Changing Automatic Update Options
Your printer software for Windows automatically checks for updates to the product software. You can
change how often the software checks for updates or disable this feature.
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
2. Select Software Update Settings.
You see this window:
3. Do one of the following:
• To change how often the software checks for updates, select a setting in the Check every menu.
• To disable the automatic update feature, select the Never option.
4. Click OK to exit.
Note: If you choose to disable the automatic update feature, you can check for updates manually.
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Printing on a Mac
You can print with your product using any Mac printing program, as described in these sections.
197
Note: If you have an Internet connection, it is a good idea to check for updates to your product software
on Epson's support website or using Epson Software Updater.
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Selecting Print Layout Options - Mac
Selecting Advanced Settings - Mac
Selecting Roll Paper Settings - Mac
Selecting Paper Configuration Settings - Mac
Managing Color - Mac
Sizing Printed Images - Mac
Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Select the basic settings for the document you want to print.
Note: Some screens may look different, depending on the Mac OS version you are using.
1. Open a document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. Select your product as the Printer setting.
4. If necessary, click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the
print window.
198
You see the expanded printer settings window for your product:
Note: The print window may look different, depending on the Mac OS version and the application
you are using.
199
5. Select the Copies and Pages settings as necessary.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu.
6. Select the page setup options: Paper Size and Orientation.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu. Paper sizes may
include additional options such as Borderless.
7. Select any application-specific settings that appear on the screen.
8. Do one of the following:
• macOS 13: Select the Printer Options menu and then select Printer Settings.
• macOS 12 and earlier: Select Print Settings or Printer Features from the pop-up menu.
You see a screen like this:
200
Note: The available print settings and appearance of the print window may be different than those
covered here, depending on the Mac OS version and the application you are using.
9. If Roll Switching is set to Auto on the printer's control panel settings, the screen will show the
settings for the roll paper currently in use. Change the paper, if desired.
Note: Click Acquire Info to refresh the settings if you loaded or changed paper after opening the
print window.
10. If necessary, select the Page Setup setting that matches the paper source you are using.
Note: If you select Roll Paper, select the width of the roll as the Roll Paper Width setting.
11. If you want your printout to be a different size than the displayed Paper Size setting, select the
Output Size setting in the dropdown menu.
Note: Select Specify Size to set a user-defined output size.
12. Select the Paper Source setting that matches the paper feeding method you are using.
Note: If you select Roll Paper, select the width of the roll as the Roll Paper Width setting.
13. Select the Media Type setting that matches the paper you loaded.
Note: If you want to use paper settings that have been set in the printer's control panel, select Use
Printer Settings.
14. Select the Select Target setting that matches the document you are printing.
Note: If you want the printer driver to determine print settings based on the document type, select
the Simple Settings checkbox. Deselect the checkbox if you want to select your own color
correction, print mode, or other settings.
15. If you want to prioritize quality over print speed, select Print with High Quality.
16. If you deselect the Simple Settings checkbox, the following options are available:
• Print Mode: choose a printout color
• Color Mode: choose a color mode to fine-tune printout colors
201
• Print Quality: choose speed or quality as the printing priority
• Paper Edge Quality: select to prevent images on the edge of the paper from appearing faint or
scuffed
Note: Selecting Paper Edge Quality may decrease the print speed.
• High Speed: select for Bi-Directional printing
• Finest Detail: select to sharpen edges on vector-based data including text, graphics, and line art
Note: Enabling Finest Detail may decrease the print speed.
Note: Available options depend on the selected Select Target setting.
17. To see a preview of how your document will print, select Print Preview. (The preview appears after
you click Print but before printing starts.)
Paper Size Options - Mac
Paper Source Options - Mac
Print Mode Options - Mac
Color Mode Options - Mac
Parent topic: Printing on a Mac
Related tasks
Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac
Selecting Advanced Settings - Mac
Paper Size Options - Mac
You can select any of the Paper Size options in the Printer Settings menu to size your printed image.
Same as Paper Size
Sizes your printed image to fit the selected paper size.
Fit to Roll Paper Width
Sizes your printed image to fit the width of the roll paper you loaded.
Output Size
Sizes your printed image to fit the selected output size.
Specify Size
Sizes your printed image to a specified size.
202
Retain Scale
Retains the size of the original image.
Banner
Select when using an application designed for banners.
Note: If you want to select Retain Scale or Banner, but they are not available, check the Paper Size list
and select a paper size that has (Retain Scale) or (Roll Paper Banner) included in the paper name. For
example, to print a banner on A2-width paper, select A2 (Roll Paper Banner) as the Paper Size setting.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Paper Source Options - Mac
You can select any of the available options in the Source menu to print on the paper loaded in that
source.
Auto
Selects the appropriate roll for printing.
Roll 1/Roll
Selects roll paper loaded in Roll 1 (on dual roll models) or Roll (on single roll models).
Roll 2
Selects roll paper loaded in Roll 2 (not available on SureColor P6570E/T3770E).
Cut Sheet
Selects the cut sheet loaded in the paper feeder.
Poster Board
Selects the poster board loaded in the paper feeder.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Print Mode Options - Mac
You can select a Print Mode option to determine the color of your printouts.
Color
Select to print your document in color.
Black
Select to print your document in black and white (grayscale is supported).
Black (Bi-Level)
Select to print CAD drawings in black and white (grayscale is not supported).
Colored Paper (Yellow)
Select to print on colored paper.
203
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Color Mode Options - Mac
You can adjust the Color Mode setting to fine-tune the colors in your printout or turn off color
management in your printer software.
Note: Available color mode options vary with the operating system and the type of paper used.
EPSON Standard (sRGB)
Optimizes the output to mimic sRGB (best if sRGB is the source color space).
Adobe RGB
Optimizes the output to mimic Adobe RGB (best if sRGB is the source color space).
Business Graphics
Performs color correction to optimize your images based on the sRGB space (SureColor T-Series
models only).
Line Drawing
Optimizes color correction for line drawings by processing the border between lines and the
background as discontinuous.
ICM
Performs color management to match the colors in the image data to those in the printed output
(Windows only).
Off (No Color Adjustment)
Turns off color management in your printer software so you can manage color using only your
application software.
Note: An ICC profile is required if color management is turned off.
204
From the Printer Options menu, select Color Controls and specify values for adjusting brightness,
contrast, saturation, and individual Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow color tones. You can choose from two
Gamma settings, and use either a color circle or slide bar to adjust color.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Selecting Print Layout Options - Mac
You can select a variety of layout options by selecting Layout on the print window.
• To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, select the number of pages in the Pages per Sheet
pop-up menu. To arrange the print order of the pages, select a Layout Direction setting.
205
• To print borders around each page on the sheet, select a line setting from the Border pop-up menu.
• To invert or flip the printed image, select the Reverse page orientation or Flip horizontally settings.
Parent topic: Printing on a Mac
Selecting Advanced Settings - Mac
You can select roll paper settings and adjust color density from the Advanced menu.
1. Select Advanced from the Printer Options drop-down menu.
You see this window:
Note: Some settings may not be available, depending on the selected paper source and the Roll
Paper option you selected for your paper size.
2. Select one of the following Auto Cut settings:
• Off: Select this option to cut your prints manually.
206
• Single Cut: Prints images end-to-end with no gap between them. Borderless images may overlap
slightly.
• Double Cut: Increases the space between each image and trims each print individually, providing
the cleanest edge for borderless printing.
207
• Normal Cut: Creates a margin at the top and bottom of your image and automatically cuts the
paper. These margins vary by media type and may be changed from their defaults using custom
media settings.
3. Select the following settings as necessary:
• Select the Auto Rotate checkbox to automatically position the image or print data to fit the roll
paper.
• Select the Print Page Line checkbox to print lines between pages as a guide for manual cutting.
• When Auto Cut is enabled, select the Save Roll Paper checkbox to have the printer cut the roll
paper at the end of the image as positioned on the page.
4. If you want to adjust color density, adjust the Black and Color settings, and click OK.
5. Adjust the amount of image expansion when printing borderless images, if necessary.
Note: This option is available only when you choose a Paper Size setting with a Borderless option.
Parent topic: Printing on a Mac
Selecting Roll Paper Settings - Mac
To print on roll paper, you select the roll paper size and roll paper options from the Printer Settings
menu.
1. Select Manage Custom Sizes as the Paper Size setting.
2. Click +, double-click Untitled, and enter a name for your roll paper size.
208
3. Enter the width of the roll paper image as the Width setting.
Note: Make sure your image fits within the width of your roll paper.
4. Enter the length of your roll paper image as the Height setting.
5. Select your product from the Margins menu to automatically select the largest paper size for your
product.
6. Click OK.
7. Select your new custom roll paper size as the Paper Size setting.
8. Select Roll Paper Settings.
You see this window:
Note: Some settings may not be available, depending on the Roll Paper option you selected for your
Paper Size.
209
9. Select one of the following Auto Cut settings:
• Off: Select this option to cut your prints manually.
• Single Cut: Prints images end-to-end with no gap between them. Borderless images may overlap
slightly.
• Double Cut: Increases the space between each image and trims each print individually, providing
the cleanest edge for borderless printing.
210
• Normal Cut: Creates a margin and the top and bottom of your image.
10. Select the following settings as necessary:
• Select the Auto Rotate checkbox and select the roll paper width to fit the images to the paper
size.
• Select the Print Page Line checkbox to print trim lines around images when you select a banner
paper size.
• Click Save Roll Paper to minimize the amount of blank paper wasted when you print on banner
paper.
• Adjust the Color Density as necessary.
• Adjust the amount of image expansion when printing borderless images.
Note: This option is available only when you choose a Paper Size setting with a Borderless
option.
11. Click OK, then click Print.
Parent topic: Printing on a Mac
211
Selecting Paper Configuration Settings - Mac
If you are using non-Epson media and need to fine-tune its print quality, select Paper Handling from the
setup screen. Select the available options as necessary.
Parent topic: Printing on a Mac
Managing Color - Mac
You can adjust the Color Matching settings to fine-tune the colors in your printout, or turn off color
management in your printer software.
Note: The menus may look different, depending on the Mac OS version and the application you are
using.
1. Do one of the following:
• macOS 13: Select the Color Matching menu.
• macOS12 or earlier: Select Color Matching from the pop-up menu in the print window.
212
You see a menu like this:
2. Select one of the available options.
Color Matching Options - Mac
Parent topic: Printing on a Mac
Color Matching Options - Mac
You can select from these settings on the Color Matching menu.
ColorSync
Prints using standard color profiles for your product and paper to help match image colors. You can
customize the conversion method and filter settings on the ColorSync pop-up menu in the print
window.
EPSON Color Controls
Lets you manage color using controls in your printer driver or turn off color management.
Parent topic: Managing Color - Mac
213
Sizing Printed Images - Mac
You can adjust the size of the image as you print it by selecting Paper Handling from the pop-up menu
on the Print window.
• To collate multiple copies into sets of documents, move the Collate Sheets selector to the On
position.
• To print only selected pages in a multi-page document, select an option from the Sheets to Print
menu.
• To adjust the order in which pages are printed, select an option from the Sheet Order menu.
• To scale the image to fit on a specific paper size, move the Scale to Fit Paper Size selector to the On
position and select a paper size from the Destination Paper Size menu.
• To restrict scaling of the image to reduced sizing, move the Scale Down Only selector to the On
position. (Move the selector to the Off position when enlarging the image.)
Parent topic: Printing on a Mac
Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
You can select printing preferences that apply to all the print jobs you send to your product.
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Settings or System Preferences.
214
2. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options
& Supplies.
3. Select Options.
You see a screen like this:
4. Select any of the available printing options.
5. Click OK.
Printing Preferences - Mac
Parent topic: Printing on a Mac
Printing Preferences - Mac
You can select from these settings on the Options tab.
Acquire printer information automatically
Ensures that the paper size and paper type settings are automatically updated if paper is loaded or
changed after closing the print window.
Maintenance Call Notification
Alerts you if the maintenance box is nearing capacity or needs to be replaced.
215
Warning Notifications
Lets you choose whether or not to receive warning notifications from the printer software for various
operating conditions.
Establish bidirectional communication
Allows the product to communicate with the computer. Do not change the default setting unless you
experience issues when using a shared printing pool.
Default Media Type
Select the Media Type that you want to use as the default in the printer driver.
Reduce Edge Blurriness
Reduces edge blurring in image outlines, text, and ruled lines.
Reduce Print Data Size
Increases print data compression to improve print speed. Not recommended when printing fine
patterns.
Parent topic: Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac
Once you have selected your print settings, you are ready to print.
Click Print at the bottom of the print window.
Checking Print Status - Mac
Parent topic: Printing on a Mac
216
Checking Print Status - Mac
During printing, you can view the progress of your print job, control printing, and check ink status.
1. Click the printer icon when it appears in the Dock.
You see the print status window:
2. Select the following options as necessary for your Mac OS version:
• To cancel printing, click the print job and click .
• To pause a print job, click the print job and click . To resume a print job, click the paused print
job and click .
Parent topic: Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac
Printing CAD Drawings
Your product can print CAD drawings from CAD software applications. You can print them using the
CAD/Line Drawing mode in the printer driver or change settings in the product to emulate HP-GL/2 or HP
RTL modes. The product automatically switches between normal printing and HP-GL/2 or HP RTL
emulation printing based on the print data it receives.
If mode switching does not execute correctly, set General Settings > Printer Settings > Printing
Language > Network to HP-GL/2.
Note: Not all HP-GL/2 and HP RTL features are supported on the product.
217
Printing CAD Drawings from the Printer Driver
Printing CAD Drawings in HP-GL/2 or HP RTL Mode
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Printing CAD Drawings from the Printer Driver
You can print CAD drawings using the CAD/Line Drawing mode in your printer driver. This printing
method is best for high quality views and drawings.
Note: If lines in your drawing are not printed properly, print the drawing using HP-GL/2 or HP RTL mode
using the product control panel.
1. Open the file you want to print in your CAD software.
2. Click Plot and select your product as the printer.
3. Click Properties.
4. On the Device and Document Settings tab, click Custom Properties.
You see the printer driver window.
5. Select the Document Size and Output Size settings as necessary.
6. Select the Source setting.
Note: If you select a roll paper option, select the width of the roll as the Roll Paper Width setting.
7. Select the Media Type setting.
8. Do one of the following:
• SureColor P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E/P8570D/P8570DL: For Print Quality, select Select Target
> Standard. Select Color, Black, or Black (Bi-Level) as the Print Mode setting.
218
• SureColor T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E/T5770D/T5770DM/T7770D/T7770DL/T7770DM: For Print
Quality, select Select Target, and then select CAD/Line Drawing - Black, CAD/Line Drawing -
Color, or CAD/Line Drawing - Bi-Level.
Note: Available settings depend on the selected media type.
Note: For Mac users, display the Print screen and select Printer Options > Printer Settings.
Then select Line Drawing for the Print Quality setting.
9. Select any other printing settings as necessary.
10. Click OK, then click Print.
11. Start printing your drawing from the CAD software.
Parent topic: Printing CAD Drawings
Printing CAD Drawings in HP-GL/2 or HP RTL Mode
You can change settings in your product's control panel to print CAD drawings using HP-GL/2
(compatible with the HP Designjet 750C) or HP RTL mode. This printing method is best for maps and
blueprints, or when lines need to be emphasized.
Note: The product emulates HP-GL/2 or HP RTL commands, however, not all HP-GL/2 and HP RTL
features are supported on the product. If you intend to use an untested application, we recommend that
you test its output in advance. For a list of applications that have been pre-tested, visit Epson's support
site.
1. On the LCD screen, select > General Settings > Printer Settings > Universal Print Settings.
219
You see this screen:
2. Make sure the Paper Source setting is set to Roll Paper.
Note: If roll paper is not selected when HP-GL2 or HP RTL print data is sent, an error occurs.
3. Select any other settings as necessary.
4. Select the left arrow to return to the previous screen.
5. Select HP-GL/2 Unique Settings.
You see this screen:
220
6. Change the settings as necessary.
7. Select the left arrow to return to the previous screen.
8. Select Printing Language.
• If you are printing over USB, select USB and change the Printing Language setting to HP-GL/2.
• If you are printing over a network, select Network and change the Printing Language setting to
HP-GL/2.
Note: Make sure you return the Printing Language setting to Auto when you are done printing in
HP-GL/2 mode.
9. Open the file you want to print in your CAD software.
10. Click Plot and select your product as the printer.
11. Start printing your drawing from the CAD software.
Parent topic: Printing CAD Drawings
Printing from a Shared Folder
You can select and print a file from a shared network folder that has been setup in advance using the
printer's screen or in Web Config.
1. On the LCD screen, select Network Folder.
The files in the shared folder appear.
221
2. Select a single file to print.
3. Select B&W or Color.
4. Choose one of the following:
• If using advanced settings such as enlarging or reducing print size, go to the next step.
• If printing at actual size without advanced settings, skip to step 6.
5. Select the Advanced tab and make the following settings as necessary:
• Click Reduce/Enlarge to reduce or enlarge the image.
• To automatically enlarge the image to fit the width of the roll paper or the size of the cut sheet
paper loaded in the printer, set Auto Fit Page to On.
6. Change other settings, as necessary.
7. Select Print.
You can print the following file types from a shared folder:
• JPEG
• HP-GL/2
• TIFF
• PDF (models without the Adobe Embedded Print Engine (SureColor
P6570DE/P6570E/T3770DE/T3770E) can only print data created using the scan function
provided by Epson inkjet printers.)
Note: You need the SSD unit to print multiple copies. Install the SSD unit if necessary, and create a
storage space. (The SSD unit is included with SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM and optional for all
other models.)
Your file starts printing.
Setting Up a Shared Folder from the Control Panel
Setting Up a Shared Folder Using Web Config
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Setting Up a Shared Folder from the Control Panel
You must set up a shared network folder before printing from the folder. The folder must already exist on
a networked computer accessible by the product.
222
1. On the LCD screen, select > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced > Shared
Folder.
You see this screen:
2. Enter the following information about the shared folder:
• Folder Name: Enter the network path to the shared folder. You are limited to 255 characters.
• User Name: Enter a user name for the computer.
• Password: Enter the password for the computer.
3. Select Proceed to set up the shared folder.
Parent topic: Printing from a Shared Folder
Setting Up a Shared Folder Using Web Config
You can set up a shared network folder using Web Config. The folder must already exist on a networked
computer accessible by the product.
1. Access the Web Config interface via a web browser.
2. Select Basic on the Print tab.
Note: If the Print tab is not present, check with your system administrator.
223
You see this screen:
3. Enter the following information about the shared folder:
• Print from Folder: Select Enable.
• Folder Name: Enter the network path to the shared folder. You are limited to 255 characters.
• User Name: Enter a user name for the computer.
• Password: Enter the password for the computer.
4. Click OK to set up the shared folder.
Parent topic: Printing from a Shared Folder
Printing from a Web Browser
You can upload and print files directly from the Web Config interface. This allows you to print from a
computer without the printer driver for the product.
Note: Not all HP-GL/2 and HP RTL features are supported on the product.
1. Make sure paper is loaded into the product.
2. Access the Web Config interface via a web browser.
3. Select Upload and Print on the Print tab.
Note: If the Print tab is not present, check with your system administrator.
224
You see this screen:
4. Select your print settings from the Basic Settings and Advanced tabs.
Note: As soon as you select a file to print, printing will begin. Make sure you select all necessary
settings before selecting a file.
Note: You need the SSD unit to print multiple copies. Install the SSD unit if necessary, and create a
storage space. (The SSD unit is included with SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM and optional for all
other models.)
5. After you are done selecting print settings, drag and drop your file onto the appropriate area to start
printing, or click Select Files to Upload and browse to the files you want to print.
You can print the following file types from the Web Config interface:
• JPEG
• HP-GL/2
• TIFF
• PDF
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Switching the Roll Paper for Printing
You can automatically switch to the appropriate roll paper for a print job, as described in these sections
(not available on SureColor P6570E/T3770E).
225
Switching Rolls According to Paper Type
Switching Rolls According to Page Size
Switching Rolls when Paper Runs Out
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Switching Rolls According to Paper Type
If you frequently use different paper types for different purposes, such as printing drawings for review on
plain paper and printing drawings for submission on colored paper, you can set the printer to
automatically switch to the roll that has the same paper type as the print job.
Note: The appearance of the print window may differ slightly from those shown here, depending on the
Windows or Mac version you are using.
1. Load different types of paper with the same paper width into Roll 1 and Roll 2.
2. Select > General Settings > Printer Settings > Paper Source Settings > Roll Paper Setup >
Roll Switching > Auto > Paper Type from the printer’s control panel.
3. Select Type Match.
Note: Select Disable to print even if the paper loaded in the printer and the paper type selected in
the driver are different.
226
4. Choose from the following:
• Windows: Display the printer driver's Printer Settings screen, and then select Roll Auto as the
Source setting.
227
Select the paper type you want to print on in Media Category > Paper Type.
228
• Mac: Display the Print screen on your computer and make sure roll paper is selected as the Paper
Size. Select Printer Options> Printer Settings, and then select Auto as the Paper Source
setting.
229
Select the paper type you want to print on in Media Type.
5. Select other settings as necessary, then print.
The printer will automatically switch to the roll that has the same paper type as the print job.
Parent topic: Switching the Roll Paper for Printing
Related tasks
Loading Roll 1/Roll Paper
Loading Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac
Switching Rolls According to Page Size
If you frequently print drawings of various sizes, you can set the printer to automatically switch the roll
paper according to the page size of the print job.
230
Note: The appearance of the print window may differ slightly from those shown here, depending on the
Windows or Mac version you are using.
1. Load paper of the same type and different size into Roll 1 and Roll 2.
2. Select > General Settings > Printer Settings > Paper Source Settings > Roll Paper Setup >
Roll Switching > Auto > Paper Width from the printer’s control panel.
3. Choose from the following:
• Select Optimize Margins to print on the roll paper with smaller margins.
• Select Width Match to print on the roll paper with the same paper width as the print job.
Note: Select Disable to print regardless of the paper width.
4. Choose from the following:
• Windows: Display the printer driver's Printer Settings screen, and then select Roll Auto as the
Source setting.
231
Select Document Size > Settings > Page Size and set the paper size set in the software.
232
• Mac: Display the Print screen on your computer, make sure roll paper is selected as the Paper
Size, and then select Auto as the Paper Source setting.
5. Select other settings as necessary, then print.
The printer will automatically switch to the roll that has the same paper size as the print job.
Parent topic: Switching the Roll Paper for Printing
Related tasks
Loading Roll 1/Roll Paper
Loading Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac
233
Switching Rolls when Paper Runs Out
When the same type of paper is loaded in Roll 1 and Roll 2, you can prioritize the roll paper with the least
amount of paper remaining, and automatically switch to the second roll when the paper runs out to
continue printing without interruption.
Note: The appearance of the print window may differ slightly from those shown here, depending on the
Windows or Mac version you are using.
1. Load paper of the same type and width into Roll 1 and Roll 2.
2. Select > General Settings > Printer Settings > Paper Source Settings > Roll Paper Setup >
Roll Switching > Auto > Paper Length from the printer’s control panel.
3. Select Remaining Amount Priority.
Note: To prevent the roll paper from being switched during printing, select Data Length Priority,
and select the remaining roll paper management settings before printing. Select Disable to print
regardless of the amount of paper remaining.
234
4. Choose from the following:
• Windows: Display the printer driver's Printer Settings screen, and then select Roll Auto as the
Source setting.
235
• Mac: Display the Print screen on your computer, make sure roll paper is selected as the Paper
Size, and then select Auto as the Paper Source setting.
5. Select other settings as necessary, then print.
Printing starts from the roll with the least amount of paper remaining. When the paper runs out, the
printer automatically switches the roll paper to continue printing.
Parent topic: Switching the Roll Paper for Printing
Related tasks
Loading Roll 1/Roll Paper
Loading Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac
236
Using the Integrated Scanner (SureColor
T5770DM/T7770DM)
You can use the integrated scanner on your product to scan and copy originals.
Supported Document Sizes and Types
Loading Originals
Using a Carrier Sheet
Copying Documents or Photos
Creating Scanning Contacts
Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Scanning to Email
Scanning to a Memory Device
Scanning to a Computer
Scanning to the SSD Unit
Supported Document Sizes and Types
You can load the following document types and sizes into the integrated scanner:
Supported Document Sizes
Width: 5.8 to 36 inches (148 to 914 mm)
Length: 5.8 to 120 inches (148 to 30480 mm)
Paper thickness: 0.002 to 0.03 inches (0.06 mm to 0.8 mm)
Note: When scanning at 600 dpi or copying at Fine or Super Fine quality, the maximum length is 108.1
inches (2747 mm).
Supported Document Types
• Plain paper
• Recycled paper
• Coated paper
• Tracing paper*
• Film
237
• Blueprints
• Actual printing stock
• Carrier sheet
* When tracing paper is loaded, the product cannot automatically detect the width of the paper. Make
sure you set the Original Size setting on the Copy menu or the Scan Size setting on the Scan menu to
the size of your original.
Caution: Do not load the following types of originals directly in the scanner, or they may cause paper
jams or damage the scanner:
• Originals that are bound
• Originals that are bent
• Originals with carbon backing
• Originals with staples, paper clips, or glue
• Originals with many holes (such as loose-leaf paper)
• Irregularly shaped originals or originals that are not cut at right angles
• Originals with attached photos, stickers, or labels
• Transparent originals
• Glossy originals
• Torn or deteriorated originals
Parent topic: Using the Integrated Scanner (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Loading Originals
You can load an original that meets the document specifications in the input slot.
Caution: Do not load photos, valuable original documents, or artwork directly into the product. This may
wrinkle or damage the original.
Note: If the original is curled or creased, straighten or smooth the irregularity before loading the
document into the product. If there is any dust or dirt on the original, make sure to remove it before
loading the document into the product. Otherwise, the quality of the scanned image may decrease. If the
original is longer than 39 inches (1 meter), support the document with your hand during scanning.
238
1. Make sure the scanner edge guide is installed on the scanner.
Note: If you are using a carrier sheet, store the scanner edge guide as shown.
Stored position
Installed position
239
2. With the side to be scanned facing up, align the right edge of the original with the scanner edge
guide.
3. Support the original with both hands and insert the top edge into the scanner slot until it is
automatically moved to the scanning position. You will hear a beep when loading is complete.
240
Note: When the automatic loading process begins, let go of the original and do not resist the loading
process.
The original is loaded and ready to be scanned.
If necessary, attach the paper basket to prevent the original from falling.
Parent topic: Using the Integrated Scanner (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Using a Carrier Sheet
You can load thin or fragile originals in the scanner using a carrier sheet (not included). Make sure the
original meets the loading specifications before scanning it.
Note: If you are using a carrier sheet, the product cannot automatically detect the width of the original. If
you are copying the original, set the Original Size setting to the size of your original. If you are scanning
the original, set the Scan Size setting to the size of your original or the Top Offset setting to 0.75 inches
(19 mm).
1. Insert the original into the carrier sheet with the printed side facing the transparent sheet. Align the
top edge of the original with the top of the carrier sheet (A) and align the side of the original with the
alignment mark (B).
241
2. Insert the carrier sheet against the right side of the scanner slot.
When you are done scanning, remove the original.
Notes on Using the Carrier Sheet
When scanning using a carrier sheet, the paper color (background color) of the document may be visible
in the scan results, or wrinkle shadows may appear. To address these concerns, you can try making
adjustments in the Remove Background setting according to the scanning method used.
• When copying: Select Copy > Advanced > Image Quality > Remove Background > Auto > Off,
and adjust the value between -4 to 4.
• When scanning and saving to an email or folder: Select Scan , and then select Email or Network
Folder/FTP depending on the target location. Select Scan Settings > Image Quality > Remove
Background > Auto > Off, and adjust the value between -4 to 4.
• When saving scanned data to an external memory device: Select Scan > To Memory Device >
Advanced > Image Quality > Remove Background > Auto > Off, and adjust the value between -4
to 4.
Parent topic: Using the Integrated Scanner (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
242
Copying Documents or Photos
You can copy documents or photos onto various sizes and types of paper, including Epson special
papers.
Note: Do not press down on the scanner cover or place anything on top of it while copying. Otherwise,
the copy results may be distorted or the original may get jammed.
1. Load the paper you want to print on in the product.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Copy.
The scanner slot opens automatically. If it does not open, use your hand to open it manually.
Note: Store the scanner edge guide when you open the scanner cover. If the document does not
feed straight, install the scanner edge guide.
243
Stored position
Installed position
244
4. With the side to be scanned facing up, align the right edge of the original as shown.
5. Support the original with both hands and insert the top edge into the scanner slot until it is
automatically moved to the scanning position. You will hear a beep when loading is complete.
245
Note: When the automatic loading process begins, let go of the original and do not resist the loading
process.
6. Select the basic and advanced copy settings as necessary.
Note: If you are using the optional carrier sheet, make sure you set the Original Size setting to the
size of your original and set the Top Offset setting to 0.75 inch (19 mm).
7. To print more than one copy, select the number (up to 99).
8. When you are ready to copy, select Copy.
Note: Do not press down on the scanner cover or place anything on top of it while copying.
Otherwise, the copy results may be distorted or the original may get jammed.
9. When scanning is complete, press the OK button on the LCD screen, and remove the original.
Printing starts when the original has been completely removed from the printer.
Copy Settings
Parent topic: Using the Integrated Scanner (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Copy Settings
Basic Settings
246
Setting Options Description
Copies 1 to 99 Specifies the number of copies to print
Color Mode Black/White
Color
Select the color mode to use when
printing
Print Quality Draft
Speed
Fine
High Quality
Max Quality
Adjusts the print quality of your copies;
selecting High provides Standard
higher quality printing, but the printing
speed may be slower.
Density -4 to 4 Adjust the lightness or darkness of
copies. Positive values increase the
density.
Paper Source Roll(Auto)
Roll 1
Roll 2
Cut Sheet
Poster Board
Select the paper source
Reduce/Enlarge Auto Fit Page Select On to fit the short edge of the
image to the width of the paper
Note: This setting is not available if
paper is not loaded into the printer.
Custom Size Select Actual Size to print using the
image size, or select Specified Size to
set a different output size
247
Setting Options Description
Page Margins option Clip by Margins Subtracts the page margin value from
the output size selected in the
Reduce/Enlarge settings.
Any print object in the margin area is
clipped and not printed.
Oversize Adds the page margin value outside
the output size selected in the
Reduce/Enlarge settings (A).
Borderless Copies the original without margins
around the edges. The image is
enlarged a little to remove margins
from the edges of the paper.
Advanced Settings
Setting Options Description
Original Type Text/Line Drawing &
Image
Tracing Paper
Blueprint
Blueprint Inverted
Watercolor Rendering
Select the type that corresponds to
the loaded original
Original Size Regular Size
User-Defined
Determines the size of the scanned
original. In most cases, Auto Detect
should be used. Tracing paper and
the optional carrier sheet are not
detected automatically.
Top Offset 0.0 to 3.94 inches
0.0 to 100.0 mm
Select the amount of area at the top
of the scanned original that will not
be scanned
248
Setting Options Description
Image Quality Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image
Color Correction Adjusts the color of the image
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of the image
Remove Background Removes backgrounds from thin
originals or images with unwanted
backgrounds
Bidirectional On
Off
Select On to print in both directions,
resulting in faster print speed but
reduced accuracy
Auto Rotate On
Off
Select On to rotate the image
automatically
File Storing — Saves copied data to a storage
space
Clear All Settings — Restores all copy settings to their
default values
Parent topic: Copying Documents or Photos
Creating Scanning Contacts
You can create email, network folder, and FTP contacts to receive your scanned images.
Creating a Shared Network Folder
Registering Contacts for Email, Network, or FTP Scanning - Control Panel
Registering Contacts for Email, Network Folder, or FTP Scanning - Web Config
Parent topic: Using the Integrated Scanner (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Creating a Shared Network Folder
You can create a shared network folder on your computer or an FTP site and register its location to your
product's Contacts list.
Note: If you are creating a shared network folder on a Mac, see your Mac documentation for instructions
on creating the folder. The instructions here are for Windows.
249
First make sure you connected your product and computer to the same network.
Note: If you are running a Home version of the Windows operating system, you cannot create a shared
folder on your Windows desktop or in the Documents or Pictures folder unless you have created a Home
Group Configuration for sharing. You can, however, create a shared folder in the root of the C: drive on
your system.
If you want to scan to a folder on an FTP server, contact the FTP server administrator for the server
address and authentication access to a shared folder on the server.
1. If you are scanning to a network folder on your computer, do one of the following to check the format
of your computer name:
• Windows 11, Windows 10, or Windows 8.x: Hold down the Windows key on your keyboard and
press the X key. Select System from the list that appears. Check the Computer Name or Device
Name listed for your computer on the System window.
• Windows 7: Click , right-click Computer, and select Properties. Check the Computer Name
listed for your computer on the System window.
Note: The settings in these steps may vary, depending on your version of Windows. See Windows
Help for details on your operating system.
2. If the computer's name uses any characters that are not alphanumeric (letters or numbers), do one
of the following to change the computer's name:
• Windows 11, Windows 10, or Windows 8.x: Select Rename this PC and follow the on-screen
prompts.
• Windows 7: Select Change Settings, change the computer's name, and click OK. (See Windows
Help for instructions, if necessary.)
Note: You need to be logged into Windows as an administrator to change the computer's name.
After changing the name, restart your computer.
3. Start File Explorer or Windows Explorer.
4. Create a folder on the Windows desktop with a folder name of 12 characters or less; otherwise, your
product may not be able to access the folder.
Note: You need to be logged into Windows as an administrator to access the desktop folder and the
document folder under each User folder.
250
5. Right-click the folder you created and select Properties.
6. On the General tab, deselect the Read-only checkbox to allow users to access the folder over the
network.
7. Select the Sharing tab and click the Advanced Sharing button.
Note: You need to be logged into Windows as an administrator to select the Advanced Sharing
button.
8. On the Advanced Sharing screen, select the Share this folder checkbox.
9. Click the Permissions button and select the following on the Share Permissions tab:
• Select Everyone under Group or user names.
• Select the checkbox in the Allow column for the Change setting.
10. Click OK to save the settings, then click OK again to close the Advanced Sharing window.
11. Select the Security tab and check that the Group or user names list at the top includes the current
computer user and the administrators who can now access the folder.
12. Select the Sharing tab again and write down the Network Path listed under Network File and Folder
Sharing at the top. This is the path you will register to your product contacts list so you can select it
for network scanning.
13. Click OK or Close.
Now you can register the folder path to your product contacts list.
Parent topic: Creating Scanning Contacts
Registering Contacts for Email, Network, or FTP Scanning - Control Panel
You can create a list of contacts for scanning to email or to a network folder or FTP.
Note: Contacts can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change contacts, contact
your administrator for assistance. You can create up to 200 contacts and contact groups combined.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select > General Settings > System Administration.
3. Select Contacts Manager.
4. Select Add/Edit/Delete.
251
You see a screen like this:
5. Select Add Entry.
6. Select Add Contact.
7. Do one of the following:
• To create a contact for scanning to email, select Email.
• To create a location for scanning to a network folder or FTP, select Network Folder/FTP.
8. Select the number you want to use for the contact you are adding.
9. Select the Name field. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the contact name (up to 30 characters)
and select OK.
10. Select the Index Word field. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for
an entry (up to 30 characters) and select OK. (This field is optional.)
11. Do one of the following:
• For an email contact, select the Email Address field. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the
address and select OK.
• For a network folder or FTP location, select the Communication Mode field and select Network
Folder (SMB) or FTP. Then select the Location field, use the on-screen keyboard to enter the
location, and select OK. Enter other information if necessary.
252
Enter the folder path name for the Location setting in one of the following formats depending on
the Communication Mode setting you selected:
• SMB: \\host name\folder
• FTP: ftp://host name/folder name
Enter additional connection information as needed.
12. To add the contact to the frequently used contacts list, select Assign to Frequent Use.
13. Select OK.
Parent topic: Creating Scanning Contacts
Registering Contacts for Email, Network Folder, or FTP Scanning - Web Config
You can register a list of contacts for scanning to email, a network folder or an FTP server using Web
Config and your computer's internet browser. You can create a total of 200 contacts and groups
combined.
Before you begin, print a network status sheet and locate the IP address for your product on the sheet.
Note: These instructions use Internet Explorer as an example browser.
1. Start Internet Explorer on a computer that is using the same network as your product.
2. Type your product's IP address into the address bar and press Enter.
3. Click Continue to this website (not recommended).
4. In the upper right corner of the screen, click Log in and enter the Administrator password.
5. Click Scan/Copy > Contacts.
6. Select the number you want to use for the contact you are adding and click Edit.
7. Select Email, Network Folder (SMB), or FTP as the Type setting.
8. Enter the following information for the contact:
• Name: The name to display in your product's contact list.
• Index Word: Enter a word to identify this entry when searching for it (up to 30 characters). This
field is optional.
• Assign to Frequent Use: If you want to identify the contact as a frequently used address, select
On. This makes it quicker to select the contact when you scan.
• Secure Connection: For FTP locations, choose whether to use FTP or FTPS when connecting
253
• Email Address: For email contacts, enter the email address
• Save to: The network path to the shared folder.
Enter the folder path name in one of the following formats depending on the Type setting you
selected:
• SMB: host_name\folder
• FTP: host_name/folder_name
• User Name and Password: Enter only if you have set up a password on your computer.
• Connection Mode: For FTP locations, select Passive Mode if there is a firewall between the
product and FTP server.
• Port Number: For FTP locations, enter the port number.
• Certification Validation: For FTP locations, select whether to require certification validation.
9. Click Apply.
After a moment, you see a message telling you that contact registration is complete.
10. Close your web browser.
Parent topic: Creating Scanning Contacts
Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
You can scan an image and save it to a network folder using your product's control panel. You can either
enter the folder path directly on the product's control panel or select a folder from the Contacts list.
Note: Make sure the date and time are set correctly before using this feature.
1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Scan.
You see a screen like this:
254
4. Select Network Folder/FTP.
5. Do one of the following:
• Select from any displayed frequent contacts.
• Select Keyboard, select the Communication Mode field, and select Network Folder (SMB) or
FTP. Then select the Location field and enter the folder location, and press OK. Enter other
information as necessary.
Enter the folder path name for the Location setting in one of the following formats depending on
the Communication Mode setting you selected:
• SMB: \\host name\folder
• FTP: ftp://host name/folder name
• Select Contacts and choose a saved folder from the Contacts list.
6. Select Scan Settings.
7. Select File Format to choose the file format for your scan.
8. Scroll down and change the File Name setting, if necessary.
9. Select any additional scan settings as necessary.
10. Select Presets to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
11. Press the Save icon.
255
Your product scans your original and saves it in the selected location.
12. After scanning is complete, hold the original and select OK to remove the original.
Scan to Network Folder/FTP Settings
Parent topic: Using the Integrated Scanner (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Scan to Network Folder/FTP Settings
Setting Options Description
Destination — Specifies the location where the
scanned image will be saved. You can
select from your existing contacts or
edit the location directly.
Scan Settings
Color Mode Black/White
Color
Select the color mode to use when
printing
File Format File Format Selects the file format for the saved
image
Compression Ratio Selects the compression ratio for the
saved image
PDF Settings Sets the permissions and passwords
for the saved PDF
Resolution 200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Select the scanning resolution
Scan Size Various sizes Determines the size of the scanned
original
Top Offset 0.0 to 3.94 inches
0.0 to 100.0 mm
Selects the amount of area at the top
of the scanned original that will not be
scanned. If you are using the optional
carrier sheet, the value should be 0.75
inch (19 mm).
256
Setting Options Description
Original Type Text/Line Drawing &
Image
Tracing Paper
Blueprint
Blueprint Inverted
Watercolor Rendering
Selects the type that corresponds to
the loaded original
Density -4 to 4 Choose the print density for the printed
output. Positive values increase the
density.
Image Quality Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of the image
Remove Background Removes backgrounds from thin
originals or images with unwanted
backgrounds
File Storing — Saves scanned data to a storage
space
File Name — Sets a file name for the scanned data
Parent topic: Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Scanning to Email
You can scan an original and email the scanned file using your product's control panel. You need to
have a preconfigured email server before you can scan to email. You can either enter the email address
directly on the product's control panel or select an address from the Contacts list. Make sure the date
and time are set correctly so the time stamps on your emails are accurate.
Note: The email server and printer must be connected to the same network; scanning to email does not
work with web-based email services.
Note: You can also use the Scan to Document Capture Pro function to scan and email the scanned file.
1. Load your original into the product for scanning.
257
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Scan.
You see a screen like this:
4. Select Email.
5. Do one of the following:
• Select from any displayed frequent contacts.
• Select Keyboard to use the displayed keyboard to enter the address for the recipient and press
OK.
• Select Contacts and choose an email address from the Contacts list.
• Select History to choose an email address from your recent scan history.
6. Select Scan Settings.
7. Select File Format to choose the file format for your scan.
8. Scroll down and change the Subject and File Name settings, if necessary.
9. Select any additional scan settings as necessary.
10. Select Presets to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
11. Press the Save icon.
258
Your product scans your original and emails the scanned file.
12. While holding the original, select OK to remove the original from the product.
Scan to Email Settings
Parent topic: Using the Integrated Scanner (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Scan to Email Settings
Setting Options Description
Destination — Specifies the recipient of the scanned
image. You can select from your
existing contacts or enter the recipient
directly.
Scan Settings
Color Mode Black/White
Color
Select the color mode to use when
printing
File Format File Format Select the file format for the saved
image
Compression Ratio Selects the compression ratio for the
saved image
PDF Settings Sets the permissions and passwords
for the saved PDF
Resolution 200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Select the scanning resolution
Scan Size Various settings
User-Defined
Determines the size of the scanned
original
Top Offset 0.0 to 3.94 inches
0.0 to 100.0 mm
Selects the amount of area at the top
of the scanned original that will not be
scanned
259
Setting Options Description
Original Type Text/Line Drawing &
Image
Tracing Paper
Blueprint
Blueprint Inverted
Watercolor Rendering
Select the type that corresponds to the
loaded original
Density -4 to 4 Choose the print density for the printed
output. Positive values increase the
density.
Image Quality Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of the image
Remove Background Removes backgrounds from thin
originals or images with unwanted
backgrounds
File Storing — Saves the scanned data to a storage
space
Subject — Specifies the contents of the subject of
the email. The subject is restricted to
single-byte characters and symbols.
Attached File Max Size 1MB
2MB
5MB
10MB
20MB
30MB
Limits the size of the file attached to
the email
File Name — Set a file name for the scanned data
Mail Encryption On
Off
Select On to encrypt outgoing mail
260
Setting Options Description
Digital Signature On
Off
Select On to add an electronic
signature
Menu Show Sent History
Email Server
View sent history and server logs
Computer — Save scanned data to a specified
computer
Contacts Manager
Setting Options Description
Add/Edit/Delete — Add, edit, or delete your contacts
Frequent Email
Network
Folder/FTP
Displays addresses that have been set for
frequent use. You can also set addresses for
standard use.
Print Contacts List of all
Contacts
List of Email
Contacts
List of
Network
Folder/FTP
Contacts
Print the contacts list in the specified area
View Options Tile View
List View
Select the format in which you want to view
your contacts
Search Options Begins with
Ends with
Includes
Set the search parameters for your contacts
lists
Parent topic: Scanning to Email
261
Scanning to a Memory Device
You can scan an original and save the scanned image to a memory card or external USB device.
1. Connect an external USB device to the port on the front of the product.
2. Place your original on the product for scanning.
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Scan.
You see a screen like this:
262
5. Select Memory Device.
You see a screen like this:
6. Change any of the displayed settings on the Basic Settings tab as necessary.
7. Select the Advanced tab to view and change additional scan settings, if necessary.
8. On the Basic Settings tab, press the Save icon to start scanning.
Your product scans your original and saves the scanned file to the USB device.
9. While holding the original, select OK to remove the original.
Scan to Memory Device Settings
Parent topic: Using the Integrated Scanner (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Scan to Memory Device Settings
Basic Settings
Setting Options Description
Color Mode Black/White
Color
Selects the color mode to use when
printing
263
Setting Options Description
File Format File Format Selects the file format for the saved
image
Compression Ratio Selects the compression ratio for the
saved image
PDF Settings Sets the permissions and passwords
for the saved PDF
Resolution 200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Select the scanning resolution
Scan Size Various settings Select the size of the scanned original.
In most cases, Auto Detect should be
used.
Top Offset 0.0 to 3.94 inches
0.0 to 100.0 mm
Selects the amount of area at the top
of the scanned original that will not be
scanned
Original Type Text/Line Drawing &
Image
Tracing Paper
Blueprint
Blueprint Inverted
Watercolor Rendering
Selects the type that corresponds to
the loaded original
Advanced
Setting Options Description
Density -4 to 4 Choose the print density for the printed
output. Positive values increase the
density.
264
Setting Options Description
Image Quality Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of the image
Remove Background Removes backgrounds from thin
originals or images with unwanted
backgrounds
File Storing — Save scanned data to a storage space
File Name — Set a file name for the scanned data
Parent topic: Scanning to a Memory Device
Scanning to a Computer
You can scan an image and save it to your computer using your product's control panel.
Note: Make sure the date and time are set correctly before using this feature.
1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Scan.
4. Select Computer.
5. Select the computer on which Document Capture Pro is installed.
The scanner slot opens automatically.
6. Select the Scan icon.
Document Capture Pro opens and your product scans the original and sends the scanned file to the
connected computer.
Parent topic: Using the Integrated Scanner (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Scanning to the SSD Unit
You can scan an image and save it to the built-in SSD unit using your product's control panel.
Note: Make sure the date and time are set correctly before using this feature.
265
1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Scan.
4. Select Storage > Store To.
5. Select the location.
The scanner slot opens automatically.
6. Select the Store icon.
Your product scans the original and sends the scanned file to the SSD unit.
Scan to Storage Settings
Parent topic: Using the Integrated Scanner (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Scan to Storage Settings
Setting Options Description
Store To — Specify the location for the scanned
data
Scan Settings
Color Mode Black/White
Color
Select the color mode to use when
scanning
Resolution 200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Select the scanning resolution
Scan Size Various settings Select the size of the scanned original
Top Offset — Scan to align with the top edge
266
Setting Options Description
Original Type Text/Line Drawing &
Image
Tracing Paper
Blueprint
Blueprint Inverted
Watercolor Rendering
Select the type that corresponds to the
loaded original
Density -4 to 4 Choose the print density for the printed
output. Positive values increase the
density.
Image Quality Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of the image
Remove Background Removes backgrounds from thin
originals or images with unwanted
backgrounds
File Name — Set a file name for the scanned data
File Password — Set a password for the scanned data
User Name — Specify the name of the user who
created the scanned data
WSD — When enabled, WSD (Web Service for
Devices) for Windows OS can
automatically detect devices on the
network
Parent topic: Scanning to the SSD Unit
267
Printing from a USB Memory Device
You can save JPG, TIFF, HP-GL/2, and some PDF files on a USB memory device and then connect the
device to the printer for printing.
Note: On models without the Adobe Embedded Print Engine (SureColor
P6570DE/P6570E/T3770DE/T3770E), PDF files must be created using the scan function of an Epson
inkjet printer.
Make sure your USB memory device meets these requirements:
• Format type: FAT, FAT32, or exFAT
• No security functions such as encryption or passwords
Connecting and Printing from a USB Memory Device
Connecting and Printing from a USB Memory Device
You can print from a USB memory device connected to your printer.
Note: Connections that use an extension cable, a USB hub, or a card reader cannot be guaranteed.
1. Connect the USB memory device containing the saved data to the USB memory device port on the
control panel.
268
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Memory Device.
4. Select the menu option that matches the format of the file you want to print.
5. Do one of the following to select a single image to print:
• For JPEG: Select an image and select Proceed to Print (a check mark will appear on the
selected image). Select Single View to view the selected image individually.
• For TIFF or PDF: Select a file name from the list on the screen.
Note: Files in formats other than JPEG, TIFF, or PDF are not displayed on the LCD screen. Any
characters in the folder or file names that cannot be displayed by the printer are displayed as a
question mark.
6. Select the paper source and either B&W or Color.
7. Choose one of the following:
• If using advanced settings such as enlarging or reducing print size, go to the next step.
• If printing at actual size without advanced settings, skip to step 10.
8. Select the Advanced tab and select any necessary settings. You can select Reduce/Enlarge to set
the reduce/enlarge ratios. If you set Auto Fit Page to On, printing is performed by automatically
enlarging to fit the width of the roll paper or the size of the cut sheet paper loaded in the printer.
Note: You can select Presets to use a previously saved group of settings. The Preview button
allows you to check the print image (JPEG, TIFF, or PDF only).
9. Change other settings, as necessary.
10. Select Print to begin printing.
Note: You need the SSD unit to print multiple copies. Install the SSD unit if necessary, and create a
storage space. (The SSD unit is included with SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM and optional for all
other models.)
Parent topic: Printing from a USB Memory Device
269
Using the Solid State Drive (SSD) Unit
The SSD unit allows you to store and retrieve data quickly and reliably.
Note: The SSD unit is pre-installed on SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM; it is an option for all other
models.
You can create multiple storage spaces in Storage to organize your documents so that you can easily
locate the data when needed.
SSD Unit Storage Options
Using the SSD Unit from Your Computer
Creating a Storage Space
Saving Data to Storage
Printing Stored Data
Managing Storage Spaces and Documents
SSD Unit Storage Options
You can save documents and scanned data (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM) to the Storage space on
the SSD unit. You can also create additional Storage spaces and set up passwords and access
restrictions for shared folders.
Type Description
Shared Storage (Fixed) Common storage space for all users.
Anyone can store and use documents in the fixed
Storage space, however, only administrators can
change the Folder Name, set a password, or
delete the storage space.
Shared Storage Create multiple storage spaces to organize your
documents.
You can set a password for the space to limit
storage and retrieval of documents to a select
number of users. You can also set a password for
each document to restrict access to it.
270
Type Description
Personal Folder When user authentication is enabled, only logged-
in users can store and retrieve documents.
Users can only have one Personal Folder, and it is
not displayed when other users log in.
Caution: The following situations may cause loss or corruption of data in Storage. Epson is not
responsible for any data loss, data corruption, or problems due to any cause, including those listed
below and within the warranty period. Epson is also not responsible for the recovery of lost or corrupted
data.
• The disk is used incorrectly
• The disk is affected by static electricity or electrical noise
• The disk is damaged by a natural disaster
• After a malfunction or repair
Note: To remove the optional SSD unit, select General Settings > System Administration > Disable
the Optional storage unit (applicable to all models except SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM).
Parent topic: Using the Solid State Drive (SSD) Unit
Related tasks
Creating a Storage Space
Restricting Operations for Shared Storage Spaces
Using the SSD Unit from Your Computer
In order to use the SSD unit from your computer, you need to select settings in the printer driver in
advance.
Do one of the following:
Windows:
1. In the Windows control panel, select Printers & Scanners, select your product, and open the Printer
Properties screen.
2. Click on the Optional Settings tab.
271
3. Select Acquire from Printer and click on Get.
If Installed is displayed under Option Storage in the Current Printer Information section, you can use
the SSD unit.
Mac:
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings. Select Print & Fax,
Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options & Supplies. Select
Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
272
2. Select EPSON Status Monitor and click on Storage Settings.
273
3. Select your settings on the Storage Settings screen and click Apply.
You can now use the SSD unit.
Parent topic: Using the Solid State Drive (SSD) Unit
Creating a Storage Space
A shared Storage space can be created by an administrator or a user. However, users can only create
Storage spaces if General Settings > Storage Settings > Shared Folder Access Control > Access is
set to Allowed and Operation Authority is set to User.
Only administrators can create a Personal Folder.
1. Select the Storage icon on the product's control panel.
274
2. Select the following settings on the Storage Settings screen:
• Storage number: Enter a storage number. If no number is entered, one will be assigned
automatically.
• Folder Name (required): Enter a folder name using up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
• Storage Password: Set a password to restrict the use of the Storage space. Once a password is
set, you will be required to enter a password to save or view documents in Storage, and perform
Storage operations.
• Automatic File Deletion Settings: Set whether or not to automatically delete saved documents.
Parent topic: Using the Solid State Drive (SSD) Unit
Related references
Storage Settings Menu
Saving Data to Storage
When printing a document from your computer, you can select where you want to store it. You can also
save the print data to Storage without printing the document.
Saving Data to Storage - Windows
Saving Data to Storage - Mac
Saving Data from a USB Memory Device to Storage
Parent topic: Using the Solid State Drive (SSD) Unit
Saving Data to Storage - Windows
You can print a document from your computer and save it to a specified Storage space on the SSD unit.
You can also save the print data directly to Storage without printing the document.
1. In the Windows control panel, select Printers & Scanners, select your product, and open the
Printer Properties screen.
2. Select the Advanced tab.
3. Select Job Type > Save to Storage and Print.
Note: To save the print data to Storage without printing the document, select Job Type > Save to
Storage.
4. Click Settings.
275
5. If the folder name you want to save to is not displayed in the Folder Name field on the Storage
Settings screen, click Storage Settings, add the folder name in Folder List (Printer), and click OK.
Note: If the folder name you want to save to is not displayed in Folder List (Printer), click Update
Folder List and wait for the update to complete.
6. On the Storage Settings screen, select the folder name you want to save to from the Folder Name
list.
Note: If you do not know the password, contact your administrator.
7. Make other settings as necessary, then click OK.
8. If you want to change the resolution of the print data when saving to Storage, click the Printer
Settings tab and select Print Quality > Advanced Settings, select the print quality on the Quality
Options screen, and click OK.
9. Select other settings as necessary, then click OK.
10. Click Print.
Parent topic: Saving Data to Storage
Saving Data to Storage - Mac
You can print a document from your computer and save it to a specified Storage space on the SSD unit.
You can also save the print data directly to Storage without printing the document.
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings. Select Print &
Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options & Supplies.
Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
2. On the Epson Printer Utility screen, click Storage Settings .
3. Set the save location, then click OK.
4. On the Print Settings screen, select Save to Storage and Print as the printing method.
Note: To save the print data to Storage without printing the document, select File Storing as the
printing method.
5. Select other settings as necessary, then click Print.
Parent topic: Saving Data to Storage
276
Saving Data from a USB Memory Device to Storage
You can save data from a USB memory device to Storage.
1. Connect the USB memory device to the product's USB memory port.
2. On the product's control panel, select the home icon, if necessary.
3. Select Memory Device.
4. Select the type of data you want to save, and then select a file.
5. Select the Advanced tab, and set the File Storing setting to On.
6. Specify the Storage space, and select other settings as necessary.
Note: In the Setting menu, select whether you want to print the file when saving it to Storage.
7. Press the start button.
Parent topic: Saving Data to Storage
Related references
Memory Device Settings Menu
Printing Stored Data
You can print the data stored on the SSD unit.
1. Select the Storage icon on the product's control panel.
2. Select the file you want to print.
3. Set the number of copies you want to print.
4. Make other print settings as necessary.
5. Press the start button.
Parent topic: Using the Solid State Drive (SSD) Unit
Managing Storage Spaces and Documents
Follow the instructions in these sections to manage your storage spaces and documents on the SSD
unit.
Searching for Storage Spaces and Documents
Deleting a Document from Storage
277
Changing the Storage Period
Deleting a Storage Space
Restricting Operations for Shared Storage Spaces
Parent topic: Using the Solid State Drive (SSD) Unit
Searching for Storage Spaces and Documents
You can use the following keywords to search for Storage spaces and documents.
• Search for Storage spaces using the Storage Number or Folder Name.
• Search for documents using the Document Name or User Name.
1. Select the Storage icon on the product's control panel.
2. Enter a keyword in the search box on the Storage list or Document list screen.
Parent topic: Managing Storage Spaces and Documents
Deleting a Document from Storage
You can delete any documents that you no longer need to free up space on your drive and improve
performance.
1. Select the Storage icon on the product's control panel.
2. Select the Storage space containing the document you want to delete and select Open.
3. Select the document you want to delete and select Delete.
Note: You can also select multiple documents and delete them all at once.
Parent topic: Managing Storage Spaces and Documents
Changing the Storage Period
Documents in Storage are not automatically deleted by default. Administrators and users can change the
storage period or set it to indefinite. However, users can only change this setting when General Settings
> Storage Settings > Shared Folder Access Control > Access is set to Allowed and Automatic
Delete Setting Authority is set to User.
1. Select the Menu icon on the product's control panel.
2. Select General Settings > Storage Settings > Shared Folder File Management.
278
3. Change the storage period setting.
Parent topic: Managing Storage Spaces and Documents
Related references
Storage Settings Menu
Deleting a Storage Space
Administrators and users can delete a shared Storage space. However, users can only delete Storage
spaces when Menu > General Settings > Storage Settings > Shared Folder Access Control >
Access is set to Allowed and Automatic Delete Setting Authority is set to User.
1. Select the Storage icon on the product's control panel.
2. Select the Storage space you want to delete, and then select Delete.
• If a password has been set for the Storage space, users will need to enter the password.
Administrators can delete without entering the password.
• Users cannot delete a Storage space that contains a document with a password. Administrators
can still delete the Storage space.
• When you delete a Storage space, all of the documents in that Storage space are also deleted.
Parent topic: Managing Storage Spaces and Documents
Related references
Storage Settings Menu
Restricting Operations for Shared Storage Spaces
You can set whether to allow only administrators or other users to access shared Storage spaces.
1. Select the Menu icon on the product's control panel.
2. Select General Settings > Storage Settings > Shared Folder Access Control > Operation
Authority.
3. Select User or Administrator Only.
Parent topic: Managing Storage Spaces and Documents
279
Using the Control Panel Menus
Follow the instructions in these sections to access the printer menu system and select settings.
Accessing the Printer's Menus
Paper Setting Menu
Basic Settings Menu
Printer Settings Menu
Network Settings Menu
Scan Settings Menu (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Memory Device Settings Menu
Network Folder Menu
Storage Settings Menu
User Settings Menu
System Administration Menu
Maintenance Menu
Printer Status Menu
Accessing the Printer's Menus
You can use the printer menus to adjust the settings that control how your printer works.
1. Select the home icon, if necessary.
2. Select the Menu icon.
3. Press the up or down arrow to scroll through the menus, or swipe up or down on the LCD screen.
Note: To return to the previous screen, press the left arrow button.
4. Press the up or down arrow to move through the settings, or swipe up or down on the LCD screen.
5. To select a setting, select OK any time the OK option is displayed. You can also select a setting to
toggle it on or off.
6. When you finish changing settings on a menu, press the left arrow button to go back or select the
home icon on the control panel to completely exit the menu.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel Menus
280
Paper Setting Menu
Select > Paper Setting, then select a paper source to customize the paper options.
Roll 1 (dual roll models)/Roll Paper (single roll models) menu
Setting Options Description
Remove — Rewinds the loaded roll paper until it is
ejected from the paper feeder; information on
how to remove the roll paper is displayed on
the LCD screen.
Feed/Cut Paper Backward
Forward
Cut
Moves the paper backward or forward, or cuts
it using the built-in cutter.
281
Setting Options Description
Print Adjustments Automatic Adjustment Select Standard to automatically adjust the
paper feed and alignment settings.
Select Details if standard adjustment results
are not satisfactory, or if you want to
customize the setting based on specific
printing needs.
Paper Feed Adjust Select Auto to automatically adjust the paper
feed settings.
Select Manual if automatic adjustment results
are not satisfactory and you want to perform
adjustments based on specific printing needs;
select an adjustment setting from the
following:
• Select Quality First to print adjustment
patterns to adjust the feed for image quality.
• Select Length Accuracy First if you are
printing images that require more precise
dimensions and length, such as CAD files.
Ruled Line Alignment Select Auto(Standard) if printed ruled lines
are misaligned or print results are grainy or
otherwise unsatisfactory.
Select Auto(Details) if printed ruled lines are
misaligned at the edge of the paper or
Auto(Standard) alignment results are
unsatisfactory.
Select Manual(Standard) if automatic
alignment results are not satisfactory and you
want to precisely align the print head using the
printed adjustment patterns.
Select Manual(Details) if automatic and
standard manual alignment results are not
satisfactory and you want to select custom
settings according to specific print needs.
282
Setting Options Description
Advanced Paper Settings Various options See the Advanced Paper Settings table
below.
Remaining Amount
Management
Remaining Amount
Management
Select On to display and record the amount of
remaining roll paper.
Remaining Amount Select the amount of roll paper remaining.
Remaining Alert Select the amount of remaining roll paper
before a warning is displayed.
Change Paper Type or
Change Paper Type/Paper
Width
Paper Type Select a paper category and paper type.
Paper Width Change the paper width by setting Paper Size
Check to Off.
Select the width of the loaded paper, or select
User-Defined if the width is not listed.
Advanced Paper Settings menu (in the Roll 1 menu on dual roll models or the Roll Paper menu on
single roll models)
Setting Options Description
Confirm ICC Profile
(available only on models
with Adobe Embedded Print
Engine)
— Displays the ICC profile name when using
paper with custom paper settings.
Confirm Color Density
(available only on models
with Adobe Embedded Print
Engine)
— Displays the color density when using paper
with custom paper settings (the ink density
cannot be changed).
Paper Thickness 0.01 to 1.50 mm or
0.4 to 59.1 mil
Select the thickness of the roll paper;
displayed only when using a custom paper
type.
283
Setting Options Description
Platen Gap Auto
1.2
1.6
1.9
2.1
2.4
Select the distance between the print head
and the paper; displayed only when using a
custom paper type.
Top/Bottom Margins 3 mm
15 mm
20 mm
45 mm
Standard
Select the margin for the leading edge of the
printed image.
Depending on the paper type and printing
environment, colors may be uneven near the
leading edge if the margin is small.
Paper Suction –3 to +3 Select to adjust the printer's suction setting;
choose lower values for thinner papers.
Paper Size Check On
Off
Select On to detect the paper width when
paper is loaded.
Select Off when the paper roll is empty. This
allows you to set the paper width before
feeding the paper.
Auto Cut Follow Paper Source
Settings
Never Cut
Select Follow Paper Source Settings to
follow the cut settings in Printer Settings >
Paper Source Settings > Roll Paper Setup
> Cut Settings.
Select Never Cut to cut paper manually.
Roll Core Diameter 2inch
3inch
Select the paper core size for the loaded roll
paper.
284
Setting Options Description
Paper Eject Roller Auto
Use
Do Not Use
Select to control the paper ejection roller.
Select Auto to use the roller automatically
depending on the type of Epson paper.
Select Use to always use the roller to eject
paper.
Select Do Not Use when you are concerned
about damaging the print surface.
Paper Feed Offset –1.0 to 1.50% Select the amount of offset necessary to
reduce banding on uneven color in printouts;
displayed only when using a custom paper
type.
Restore Default Settings — Restores advanced paper settings to their
default values; not available with custom
paper types.
Caution: If the Paper Size Check setting is set to Off, the printer may print beyond the edges of the
paper, causing ink to get on the printer.
Roll 2 menu (not available on SureColor P6570E/T3770E)
Setting Options Description
Remove — Rewinds the loaded roll paper until it is
ejected from the paper feeder; information on
how to remove the roll paper is displayed on
the LCD screen.
Feed/Cut Paper Backward
Forward
Cut
Moves the paper backward or forward, or cuts
it using the built-in cutter.
Prepare for Take-up — Readies the auto take-up reel to accept roll
paper; only available if the auto take-up reel is
installed.
285
Setting Options Description
Print Adjustments Automatic Adjustment Select Standard to automatically adjust the
paper feed and alignment settings.
Select Details if standard adjustment results
are not satisfactory, or if you want to
customize the setting based on specific
printing needs.
Paper Feed Adjust Select Auto to automatically adjust the paper
feed settings.
Select Manual if automatic adjustment results
are not satisfactory and you want to perform
adjustments based on specific printing needs.
Select an adjustment setting from the
following:
• Select Quality First to print adjustment
patterns to adjust the feed for image quality.
• Select Length Accuracy First if you are
printing images that require more precise
dimensions and length, such as CAD files.
Ruled Line Alignment Select Auto(Standard) if printed ruled lines
are misaligned or print results are grainy or
otherwise unsatisfactory.
Select Auto(Details) if printed ruled lines are
misaligned at the edge of the paper or
Auto(Standard) alignment results are
unsatisfactory.
Select Manual(Standard) if automatic
alignment results are not satisfactory and you
want to precisely align the print head using the
printed adjustment patterns.
Select Manual(Details) if automatic and
standard manual alignment results are not
satisfactory and you want to select custom
settings according to specific print needs.
286
Setting Options Description
Advanced Paper Settings Various options See the Advanced Paper Settings table
below.
Remaining Amount
Management
Remaining Amount
Management
Select On to display and record the amount of
remaining roll paper.
Remaining Amount Select the amount of roll paper remaining.
Remaining Alert Select the amount of remaining roll paper
before a warning is displayed.
Change Paper Type or
Change Paper Type/Paper
Width
Paper Type Select a paper category and paper type.
Paper Width Change the paper width by setting Paper Size
Check to Off.
Select the width of the loaded paper, or select
User-Defined if the width is not listed.
Advanced Paper Settings menu (in the Roll 2 menu) (not available on SureColor P6570E/T3770E)
Setting Options Description
Confirm ICC Profile
(available only on models
with Adobe Embedded Print
Engine)
— Displays the ICC profile name when using
paper with custom paper settings.
Confirm Color Density
(available only on models
with Adobe Embedded Print
Engine)
— Displays the color density when using paper
with custom paper settings (the ink density
cannot be changed).
Paper Thickness 0.01 to 1.50 mm or
0.4 to 59.1 mil
Select the thickness of the roll paper;
displayed only when using a custom paper
type.
287
Setting Options Description
Platen Gap Auto
1.2
1.6
1.9
2.1
2.4
Select the distance between the print head
and the paper; displayed only when using a
custom paper type.
Top/Bottom Margins 3 mm
15 mm
20 mm
45 mm
Standard
Select the margin for the leading edge of the
printed image.
Depending on the paper type and printing
environment, colors may be uneven near the
leading edge if the margin is small.
Paper Suction –3 to +3 Select to adjust the printer's suction setting;
choose lower values for thinner papers.
Paper Size Check On
Off
Select On to detect the paper width when
paper is loaded.
Select Off if a paper setting error occurs when
paper is correctly loaded; this allows you to
set the paper width before feeding the paper.
Auto Cut Follow Paper Source
Settings
Never Cut
Select Follow Paper Source Settings to
follow the cut settings in Printer Settings >
Paper Source Settings > Roll Paper Setup
> Cut Settings.
Select Never Cut to cut paper manually.
Roll Core Diameter 2inch
3inch
Select the paper core size for the loaded roll
paper.
288
Setting Options Description
Paper Eject Roller Auto
Use
Do Not Use
Select to control the paper ejection roller.
Select Auto to use the roller automatically
depending on the type of Epson paper.
Select Use to always use the roller to eject
paper.
Select Do Not Use when you are concerned
about damaging the print surface.
Paper Feed Offset –1.0 to 1.50% Select the amount of offset necessary to
reduce banding on uneven color in printouts;
displayed only when using a custom paper
type.
Restore Default Settings — Restores advanced paper settings to their
default values; not available with custom
paper types.
Caution: If the Paper Size Check setting is set to Off, the printer may print beyond the edges of the
paper, causing ink to get on the printer.
Cut Sheet menu
Setting Options Description
Remove — Ejects cut sheets; information on how to
remove the cut sheets is displayed on the
LCD screen.
289
Setting Options Description
Print Adjustments Automatic Adjustment Select Standard to automatically adjust the
paper feed and alignment settings.
Select Details if standard adjustment results
are not satisfactory, or if you want to
customize the setting based on specific
printing needs.
Paper Feed Adjust Select Auto to automatically adjust the paper
feed settings.
Select Manual if automatic adjustment results
are not satisfactory and you want to perform
adjustments based on specific printing needs;
select an adjustment setting from the
following:
• Select Quality First to print adjustment
patterns to adjust the feed for image quality.
• Select Length Accuracy First if you are
printing images that require more precise
dimensions and length, such as CAD files.
Ruled Line Alignment Select Auto(Standard) if printed ruled lines
are misaligned or print results are grainy or
otherwise unsatisfactory.
Select Auto(Details) if printed ruled lines are
misaligned at the edge of the paper or
Auto(Standard) alignment results are
unsatisfactory.
Select Manual(Standard) if automatic
alignment results are not satisfactory and you
want to precisely align the print head using the
printed adjustment patterns.
Select Manual(Details) if automatic and
standard manual alignment results are not
satisfactory and you want to select custom
settings according to specific print needs.
290
Setting Options Description
Advanced Paper Settings Various options See the Advanced Paper Settings table
below.
Change Paper Type/Paper
Size
Paper Type Select a paper category and paper type.
Paper Size Select the width of the loaded paper, or select
User-Defined if the width is not listed.
Advanced Paper Settings menu (in the Cut Sheet menu)
Setting Options Description
Confirm ICC Profile
(available only on models
with Adobe Embedded Print
Engine)
— Displays the ICC profile name when using
paper with custom paper settings.
Confirm Color Density
(available only on models
with Adobe Embedded Print
Engine)
— Displays the color density when using paper
with custom paper settings (the ink density
cannot be changed).
Paper Thickness 0.01 to 1.50 mm or
0.4 to 59.1 mil
Sets the thickness of the paper; displayed
only when using a custom paper type.
Platen Gap Auto
1.2
1.6
1.9
2.1
2.4
Select the distance between the print head
and the paper; displayed only when using a
custom paper type.
Paper Suction –3 to +3 Select to adjust the printer's suction setting;
choose lower values for thinner papers.
291
Setting Options Description
Paper Size Check On
Off
Select On to detect the paper width when
paper is loaded.
Select Off if a paper setting error occurs when
paper is correctly loaded.
Paper Eject Roller Auto
Use
Do Not Use
Select to control the paper ejection roller;
select Auto to use the roller automatically
depending on the type of Epson paper.
Select Use to always use the roller to eject
paper.
Select Do Not Use when you are concerned
about damaging the print surface.
Paper Feed Offset –1.0 to 1.50% Select the amount of offset necessary to
reduce banding on uneven color in printouts;
displayed only when using a custom paper
type.
Restore Default Settings — Restores advanced media settings to their
default values; not available with custom
paper types.
Caution: If the Paper Size Check setting is set to Off, the printer may print beyond the edges of the
paper, causing ink to get on the printer.
Poster Board menu
Setting Options Description
Remove — Ejects the loaded poster board.
292
Setting Options Description
Print Adjustments Paper Feed Adjust Select Manual and select an adjustment
setting from the following:
• Select Quality First to print adjustment
patterns to adjust the feed for image quality.
• Select Length Accuracy First if you are
printing images that require more precise
dimensions and length, such as CAD files.
Ruled Line Alignment Select Manual(Standard) if automatic
alignment results are not satisfactory and you
want to precisely align the print head using the
printed adjustment patterns.
Select Manual(Details) if automatic and
standard manual alignment results are not
satisfactory and you want to select custom
settings according to specific print needs.
Advanced Paper Settings Various options See the Advanced Paper Settings table
below.
Change Paper Type/Paper
Size
Paper Type Select a paper category and paper type.
Paper Size Select a paper size or select User-Defined if
your desired size is not listed.
Advanced Paper Settings menu (in the Poster Board menu)
Setting Options Description
Confirm ICC Profile Name
(available only on models
with Adobe Embedded Print
Engine)
— The ICC profile name is displayed when using
paper with custom paper settings.
Confirm Color Density
(available only on models
with Adobe Embedded Print
Engine)
— Displays the color density when using paper
with custom paper settings (the ink density
cannot be changed).
293
Setting Options Description
Paper Thickness 0.01 to 1.50 mm or
0.4 to 59.1 mil
Sets the thickness of the paper; displayed for
custom paper settings.
Paper Suction –3 to +3 Select to adjust the printer's suction setting;
choose lower values for thinner papers.
Paper Size Check On
Off
Select On to detect the paper width when
paper is loaded.
Select Off if a paper setting error occurs when
paper is correctly loaded.
Paper Feed Offset –1.0 to 1.50 Select the amount of offset necessary to
reduce banding on uneven color in printouts;
displayed when using a custom paper type.
Restore Default Settings — Restores advanced media settings to their
default values; not available with custom
paper types.
Caution: If the Paper Size Check setting is set to Off, the printer may print beyond the edges of the
paper, causing ink to get on the printer.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel Menus
Related tasks
Loading Roll 1/Roll Paper
Loading Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Creating Custom Paper Settings
Related topics
Cutting Roll Paper
Basic Settings Menu
Select > General Settings > Basic Settings to customize various display and power settings.
Setting Options Description
LCD Brightness 1 to 9 Adjusts LCD screen brightness
294
Setting Options Description
Sounds Button Press Adjusts the volume of control panel
sounds
Paper Set Adjusts the volume of load paper
alerts
Scanner Ready Notice
(SureColor
T5770DM/T7770DM only)
Adjusts the volume of scanner alerts
Completion Notice Adjusts the volume of print completion
notification
Error Tone Adjusts the volume of error
notifications
Sound Type Adjusts the type of control panel
sounds
Inside Light Auto
Manual
Adjusts the behavior of the internal
light
Select Auto to turn the light on when a
print job is running
Select Manual to use the light icon
on the LCD screen to turn the light on
or off
Alert Lamp Notice On
Off
Enables or disables the alert lamp
notice
Sleep Timer 1 to 120 minutes Select the amount of time until the
printer enters sleep mode
Wake from Sleep Various settings Allows you to set the method for
waking from sleep mode
Power Off Timer Various times
Off
Select the amount of time until the
printer turns off automatically
(This feature may not be available
depending on your region)
295
Setting Options Description
Power Off Settings — Select to turn the printer off
automatically if it is not used for a
specified period of time
Power Off If Disconnected On
Off
Select to turn the printer off after a
specified period of time when all ports
including the LINE port are
disconnected
(This feature may not be available
depending on your region)
Circuit Breaker Interlock
Startup
On
Off
Select whether to turn the printer on or
off when the circuit breaker switch is
turned on
Date/Time Settings Date/Time Enter the date and time
Daylight Saving Time Select the daylight saving option
Time Difference Sets the time difference for
coordinated universal time (UTC)
Language Various languages Select the language used on the LCD
screen
Print Screen Professional
Simple
Switches the Home screen mode
Edit Home
(SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM
only)
Various options Customizes the Home screen display
Operation Time Out On
Off
Select On to return to the Home
screen after a few minutes of inactivity
Keyboard Various options Select the keyboard displayed on the
LCD screen
Length Unit m
ft/in
Select the unit of length displayed on
the LCD screen
296
Setting Options Description
Default Screen (Job/Status) Job Status
Log
Printer Status
Selects the information shown by
default on the Status screen
Job Status is available only if the SSD
unit is connected.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel Menus
Related tasks
Changing the LCD Screen Language
Selecting the Date and Time
Printer Settings Menu
Select > General Settings > Printer Settings to customize paper and printing options.
Setting Options Description
Paper Source Settings Various options See the Paper Source Settings table below
Custom Paper Setting 1 to 30 See the Custom Paper Setting table below
297
Setting Options Description
Auto Cleaning On Select the option to automatically perform a
print head check and cleaning when the
printer turns on and before printing
Select Standard to set a normal automatic
cleaning
Select Custom to set the timing and
frequency of automatic cleaning from the
following options:
• Nozzle Check Schedule: Sets whether to
perform a nozzle check during printing or
only after printing has finished
• Nozzle Check Sensitivity: Adjusts the
number of clogged nozzles that trigger a
cleaning cycle
• Nozzle Check Result Notice: Sets
whether the printer reports if there are still
clogged nozzles after automatic cleaning
Off Disables the print head checking and
automatic cleaning
Printing Language* USB
Network
Select the printing language to use for each
connection mode
Auto: select for most printing situations
HP-GL/2: select if HP-GL/2 or HP RTL print
data sent from a CAD application does not
automatically switch the printing mode
PS: select if PS print data does not
automatically switch the printing mode
(available only on models with Adobe
Embedded Print Engine)
Universal Print Settings* Various options See the Universal Print Settings table below
HP-GL/2 Unique Settings Various options See the HP-GL/2 Unique Settings table
below
298
Setting Options Description
PS Menu
(available only on models
with Adobe Embedded Print
Engine)
Various options See the PS Settings table below
Reduce Edge Blurriness On
Off
Select On to reduce edge blurring in image
outlines, text, and ruled lines
Memory Device Interface Enable
Disable
Select whether to enable or disable use of a
memory device
Thick Paper On
Off
Select On to widen the platen gap to prevent
scuffing if you are printing on thick paper
Bidirectional On
Off
Select On if you want the print head to move
left and right during printing
Select Off to decrease misalignment of ruled
lines, but slow down printing
Print Nozzle Check Pattern
During Print
Every Page
Off
Sets whether to print a nozzle check pattern
before the printer prints each page
Store Held Job
(SureColor P6570E/T3770E
only)
On
Off
Message displayed when storage has been
set
Use Production Stacker Enable
Disable
Select whether to enable or disable use of the
optional production stacker
Note: The production stacker option is
currently unavailable.
PC Connection via USB Enable
Disable
Select whether to enable or disable access to
the printer from a USB-connected computer
USB I/F Timeout Setting 20 to 600 seconds Specifies the length of time before ending
communication from a USB-connected
computer; available only when the SSD unit is
connected
299
Setting Options Description
Print while Scanning
(SureColor
T5770DM/T7770DM only)
On
Off
Select On to scan while printing
*The Printing Language and Universal Print Settings menus can be locked by an administrator. If you
cannot access or change these settings, contact your administrator for assistance.
Paper Source Settings
Setting Options Description
Roll Paper Setup Auto Loading Automatically feeds roll paper into the printer
Roll 1 Function
(not available on
SureColor
P6570E/T3770E)
Select Take-up to use Roll 1 for take-up,
otherwise select Advance
Roll Switching
(not available on
SureColor
P6570E/T3770E)
Select Auto to automatically switch to the
appropriate roll paper for a print job
You can select settings for switching
according to Paper Type, Paper Width, or
Paper Length
Select Roll 1 or Roll 2 when printing to
prevent automatically switching the roll paper
Print Job Priority
(not available on
SureColor
P6570E/T3770E)
Displayed when the SSD unit is installed
When Same Roll is selected, priority is given
to print jobs that are suitable for the roll paper
being fed.
When Queued Order is selected, jobs are
printed in the order in which they are received.
Switch the roll paper according to the job you
are printing.
300
Setting Options Description
Roll Paper Setup Cut Settings
Auto Cut Automatically cuts the roll paper after printing
Print Cutting Guideline Select On to print cut lines on roll paper (if
Auto Cut is turned off)
Wait for Cut Between
Pages
Select On to pause before cutting pages after
printing
Cut for Borderless Print Select Two Cuts to insert a margin and cut
twice between pages, or One Cut to cut once
between pages
Quick Cut Select On to cut once between pages while
the next page is still printing
Cut Mode Select Quiet to reduce the speed and noise
when cutting paper
Margin Refresh Select On to automatically remove ink stains
from a previous borderless print by trimming
the leading edge of the paper
Roll End Option Selects the action when roll paper runs out
and you load more paper
Continue: Prints the remaining data
Stop Printing: Does not print the remaining
data
Reprint: Restarts the print job from the
beginning; available only if the SSD unit is
installed
Take-up After Cut
(not available on
SureColor
P6570E/T3770E)
Select On to store the print on the Auto Take-
up Reel (if installed) after cutting it off the roll
Error Notice Paper Size Notice
Paper Type Notice
Detect Paper Skew
Select On to display an error message when
the output size or paper type settings differ
between the driver and printer, or if the paper
is skewed
301
Setting Options Description
Platen Gap Offset Standard
Wide
Wider
Widest
Adjusts the distance between the print head
and the paper
Cut Sheet/ Poster Board
Slot
Front
Back
Select a location for loading cut sheets or
poster board
Custom Paper Setting
You can select individual paper settings for each registered custom paper setting (in the 01 to 30 list).
Note: You cannot change individual paper settings for custom paper settings registered through the
driver or other software.
Setting Options Description
Change Name — Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a name
for the custom paper setting (this name is
displayed in the Paper Type list)
Change Reference Paper Various options Select the media type for the paper closest to
the one you are using
Advanced Paper Settings options
Confirm ICC Profile
(available only on models
with Adobe Embedded Print
Engine)
— Displays the ICC profile name when using
paper with custom paper settings
Confirm Color Density
(available only on models
with Adobe Embedded Print
Engine)
— Displays the color density when using paper
with custom paper settings (the ink density
cannot be changed)
Paper Thickness 0.01 to 1.50 mm or
0.4 to 59.1 mil
Select the thickness of the roll paper;
displayed when using a custom paper type
302
Setting Options Description
Platen Gap Auto
1.2
1.6
1.9
2.1
2.4
Select the distance between the print head
and the paper; displayed only when using a
custom paper type
Top/Bottom Margins 3 mm
15 mm
20 mm
45 mm
Select the margin for the leading edge of the
printed image; depending on the paper type
and printing environment, colors may be
uneven near the leading edge if the margin is
small
Paper Suction –3 to +3 Adjusts the printer's suction setting for the
selected source; choose lower values for
thinner papers
Paper Size Check On
Off
Select On to detect the paper width when
paper is loaded
Select Off if a paper setting error occurs when
paper is correctly loaded
Note: If this setting is set to Off, the printer
may print beyond the edges of the paper,
causing ink to get on the printer.
Auto Cut Follow Paper Source
Settings
Never Cut
Select Follow Paper Source Settings to
automatically cut roll paper after each page is
printed depending on the paper source
settings
Select Never Cut to cut paper manually
Roll Core Diameter 2-inch
3-inch
Set the paper core size for the loaded roll
paper
303
Setting Options Description
Paper Eject Roller Auto
Use
Do Not Use
Presses down on paper as it is ejected
Select Use if the print head strikes the paper.
If you are printing on glossy paper, select Do
Not Use to avoid damaging the paper surface.
Paper Feed Offset –1.0 to 1.50% Select the amount of offset necessary to
reduce banding on uneven color in printouts;
displayed only when using a custom paper
type
Delete — Deletes the registered custom paper setting
Universal Print Settings
Adjust these settings as necessary when printing in HP-GL/2 or HP RTL mode, or when using AirPrint.
Setting Options Description
Paper Source Roll(Auto)
Roll 1 (known as Roll on
SureColor P6570E/T3770E)
Roll 2 (not available on
SureColor P6570E/T3770E)
Cut Sheet
Poster Board
Select the paper source from which you
want to print
Print Quality Standard
Draft
Speed
Fine
High
Quality
Max Quality
Select the print quality
304
Setting Options Description
Color Mode Color
B&W
Select the color you want for printing
Page Margins option Clip By Margins Adds the page margin value inside the
hard clip area of the PS command of the
data, or the size selected for the Base
Output Size. Any print object in the
margin area is clipped and not printed.
Oversize Adds the page margin value outside the
hard clip area of the PS command of the
data (when Auto is selected), or outside
the size selected for the Base Output
Size (when set to a standard size).
Page Margin 3 mm
5 mm
Select the top, bottom, left, and right
margin values for roll paper.
Note: Margins are 3 mm for cut sheets
regardless of the setting.
Smoothing On
Off
Select On to print at the maximum
resolution for the selected paper type.
Note: This may result in longer printing
time or insufficient memory errors.
Base Output Size Various options When Auto (default) is selected, the hard
clip area of the PS command of the data
becomes the base output size.
Select User-Defined when printing in a
custom size.
Resolution Standard
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
Select the print resolution; when
Standard (default) is selected, available
resolutions depend on the selected paper
type
305
Setting Options Description
Select Target Poster(Photo)/ Perspective
(SureColor P-Series only)
Select desired settings
Poster/Document (SureColor
T-Series only)
GIS
CAD/Line Drawing
Off (No Color Management)
Save To Optional storage
unit
(all models except for
SureColor
T5770DM/T7770DM)
Print And Save Select settings for the optional SSD unit
Print Only
Save Only
Save to Storage
(SureColor
T5770DM/T7770DM only)
Print And Save Select settings for the SSD unit
Print Only
Save Only
HP-GL/2 Unique Settings
Adjust these settings as necessary when printing in HP-GL/2 or HP RTL mode.
Setting Options Description
Rotate 0°
90°
180°
270°
Rotate the coordinates of the drawn data
counterclockwise before printing
Origin Setup Left Edge
Center
Set the data coordinate origin
Mirror Image On Select to horizontally flip the image using
the center of the output size width as the
basis line
Off Select to print without flipping the image
306
Setting Options Description
Line Merge On Select to merge the intersection of
overlapping lines within the image
according to the MC command of the data
Off Select to move lines to be printed later to
the front at intersections
Select Target Poster(Photo)/Perspective
(SureColor P-Series only)
Select desired settings
Poster/Document (SureColor
T-Series only)
GIS
CAD/Line Drawing
Off (No Color Management)
Select Palette Software Print according to the pen configurations set
in the application and ignore the built-in
printer palette
Default Print according to the built-in printer palette
settings (logical pen with a pen width of 0.35
mm and 256 colors)
Palette A
Palette B
Print according to the built-in printer palette
settings specified under Define Palette
Print Color Palette Print Print the colors of the palette selected in
Select Palette
Define Palette Palette A
Palette B
Define a built-in palette by specifying the
pen width and color for the various types of
logical pens
Restore Default HP-
GL/2 Unique Settings
No
Yes
Select Yes to restore all HP-GL/2 unique
settings to their defaults
PS Settings (available only on models with Adobe Embedded Print Engine)
Adjust these settings as necessary when printing PostScript data.
307
Setting Options Description
Version — Displays the PostScript/PDF version
CMYK Simulation — Select the CMYK colors you want to simulate
when reproducing CMYK ink colors for an
offset printer
RGB Source — Select the RGB color definition to simulate
when printing RGB data
Rendering Intent — Selects how to convert color spaces for
various simulations
Black Point Compensation On
Off
Set to Off to darken shadows when converting
from a wide color space to a narrow color
space
Preserve Black On
Off
Set to On to print the K-axis area using black
ink when printing CMYK images
Auto Rotate On
Off
Set to On to automatically rotate print data 90°
to the right based on image size and paper
width
PS Error Sheet On
Off
Set to On to print the error message when a
PostScript error occurs
Optimize Edge Quality On
Off
Set to On to improve image quality at the
edges of your print. Reduces print speed and
increases the margin on the leading edge by
1.4 inches (35 mm).
PDF Rendering Level Levels 1 to 3 Normally, this is set to 3. Creates a PS that
reproduces the PDF as closely as possible,
but may not be printable. If this occurs, try
lowering the rendering level to correct PDF
printing errors (typical level is 3).
PDF Overprint Simulation On
Off
Set to On to print the image using transparent
colors when printing with overprint settings
Clear All Settings — Restores the PS Settings to their default
values
308
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel Menus
Related tasks
Creating Custom Paper Settings
Printing CAD Drawings in HP-GL/2 or HP RTL Mode
Network Settings Menu
Select > General Settings > Network Settings to configure your printer's network settings.
Setting Options Description
Wi-Fi Setup Connect via Wi-Fi Displays the available Wi-Fi connection
methods (Wi-Fi Setup Wizard, Push Button
Setup(WPS), Others)
Wi-Fi Direct iOS Select device and connection settings
Android
Other OS Devices
Change
Wired LAN Connection
Method
— Displays the status of the wired LAN
connection
Network Status Wired LAN/Wi-Fi Status Displays current communication status and
connection settings
Wi-Fi Direct Status Displays the number of connected devices
and connection settings
Email Server Status
(SureColor
T5770DM/T7770DM
only)
Displays information about the email server
settings
Print Status Sheet Prints the current network connection
information
Connection Check — Confirms the network status. You can also
print a connection check report.
309
Setting Options Description
Advanced Various settings Displays advanced information, such as
TCP/IP settings. You can enable or disable
other network settings.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel Menus
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Scan Settings Menu (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Select > General Settings > Scan Settings to customize various scanning settings.
Setting Options Description
Confirm Recipient On
Off
Select On to check the recipients
before scanning an original
Document Capture Pro Settings Operation Mode Select Client Mode or Server Mode
Server Address Set the server address
Group Settings Set up group settings
Email Server Off No email server set
310
Setting Options Description
Scan Options Confirm Before Ejecting
Scanned Document
Select On to hold the ejected original
and display a removal confirmation
screen after scanning
Correct Skewed Image Select On to automatically correct and
save scanned images that are skewed
Document Feed
Adjustment
Adjust the length of the printed image
if it is different from the scanned
original. Select - to reduce the length
of the printout, or + to increase the
length. Differences in length may
occur due to the type of paper.
Image Stitching
Smoother
Select On to correct color differences
between stitched images. May cause
blurred details on the border of
stitched scan images. To correct
blurriness, use the Image Stitching
Adjustment setting and/or turn this
setting off.
Image Stitching
Adjustment
Corrects misalignment in prints of
scanned images
Auto Remove
Background
Select On to remove background from
scanned image
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel Menus
Memory Device Settings Menu
You can select the following memory device settings.
Note: Settings may vary depending on the selected printer driver.
311
Setting Options Description
JPEG Display order Select the display order
Basic Settings See the Basic Settings table
below
Advanced See the Advanced table below
PDF
(available only on models with
Adobe Embedded Print Engine)
—
Displayed when the Adobe
Embedded Print Engine is
enabled
Epson Scanned PDF
(SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM
only)
Display order Select the display order
Basic Settings See the Basic Settings table
below
Advanced See the Advanced table below
TIFF Display order Select the display order
Basic Settings See the Basic Settings table
below
Advanced See the Advanced table below
HP-GL/2 Display order Select the display order
Basic Settings See the Basic Settings table
below
Advanced See the Advanced table below
Basic Settings
Setting Options Description
Paper Source Roll(Auto)
Roll 1
Roll 2
Cut Sheet
Poster Board
Select the paper source
312
Setting Options Description
Color Mode Black/White
Color
Select the color mode to use when printing
Advanced
Setting Options Description
Print Quality Draft
Speed
Fine
High Quality
Max Quality
Specify the print quality
Page Margins option Clip By Margins Adds the value selected for the page margin
inside the size selected for the base output
size
Oversize Adds the value selected for the page margin
outside the size selected for the base output
size (when set to a standard size)
Borderless Enlarges the print size slightly to print a
borderless image on roll paper
Bidirectional On
Off
Select On to print in both directions, resulting
in faster print speed but reduced accuracy
313
Setting Options Description
Select Target Poster(Photo)/
Perspective
(SureColor P-Series
models only)
Prints posters and perspective drawings that
use photos with natural colors
Poster/Document
(SureColor T-Series
models only)
Prints posters with both text and illustrations
with vivid colors
GIS Performs color correction when printing
topographical maps
CAD/Line Drawing Performs color correction when printing CAD
drawings and other line drawings
Off (No Color
Management)
Turns off color management in the printer
CMYK Simulation
(available only on models
with Adobe Embedded Print
Engine)
— Displayed when Adobe Embedded Print
Engine is enabled; select the CMYK ink color
you want to simulate when reproducing CMYK
ink colors for an offset printer
RGB Source
(available only on models
with Adobe Embedded Print
Engine)
— Displayed when Adobe Embedded Print
Engine is enabled; select the RGB color
definition you want to simulate when printing
RGB data
Rendering Intent
(available only on models
with Adobe Embedded Print
Engine)
— Displayed when Adobe Embedded Print
Engine is enabled; select how to convert the
color space when performing absolute
colorimetric, relative colorimetric, perceptual,
saturation CMYK simulation, and RGB
simulation
Target Contents
(available only on models
with Adobe Embedded Print
Engine)
— Displayed when Adobe Embedded Print
Engine is enabled; specify target contents as
Standard, GIS, or Line Drawing
314
Setting Options Description
Reduce/Enlarge Auto Fit Page Displayed when Adobe Embedded Print
Engine is enabled
Select Auto Fit Page > On to fit the short
edge of the image to the width of the paper
Note: This setting is not available if paper is
not loaded into the printer.
Select Actual Size to print using the image
size or select a different output size
Custom Size
Actual Size
Specified Size
Base Output Size — Select a base output size
File Storing
(available only when the
SSD unit is connected)
— Set the storage space in which to save data
printed from a memory device
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel Menus
Network Folder Menu
Basic Settings
Setting Options Description
Paper Source Roll(Auto)
Roll 1
Roll 2
Cut Sheet
Poster Board
Select the paper source
Color Mode Black/White
Color
Select the color mode to use when printing
Advanced Settings
315
Setting Options Description
Common Settings Print Quality Select the print quality
Bidirectional Select On if you want the print head to move left and
right during printing
Select Off to decrease misalignment of ruled lines, but
slow down printing
File Storing Save data printed from a folder to a specified storage
space
HP-GL/2 Unique
Settings
Page Margins option Select Clip by Margins to add the page margin value
inside the hard clip area of the PS command of the data,
or the size selected for the Base Output Size. Any print
object in the margin area is clipped and not printed.
Select Oversize to add the page margin value outside
the hard clip area of the PS command of the data (when
Auto is selected), or outside the size selected for the
Base Output Size (when set to a standard size).
Select Target Select desired settings
Base Output Size When Auto (default) is selected, the hard clip area of
the PS command of the data becomes the base output
size.
Select User-Defined when printing in a custom size.
316
Setting Options Description
Except for HP-GL/2 Page Margins option Select Clip by Margins to add the page margin value
inside the hard clip area of the PS command of the data,
or the size selected for the Base Output Size. Any print
object in the margin area is clipped and not printed.
Select Oversize to add the page margin value outside
the hard clip area of the PS command of the data (when
Auto is selected), or outside the size selected for the
Base Output Size (when set to a standard size).
Select Target Select desired settings
CMYK Simulation Select the CMYK colors you want to simulate when
reproducing CMYK ink colors for an offset printer
RGB Source Select the RGB color definition to simulate when
printing RGB data
Rendering Intent Selects how to convert color spaces for various
simulations
Target Contents Select the target file type
Reduce/Enlarge Select the zoom ratio for the scanned file
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel Menus
Storage Settings Menu
Select Storage to configure settings for the SSD unit (included on SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM;
optional for all other models).
Setting Options Description
Shared Folder Access
Control
Access Allows administrators to grant access to
shared folders to specific users, or
restrict shared folder access to
administrators only.
Specify whether to Allow or Not Allow
access control, then assign authority
rights.
Operation Authority
Automatic Delete Setting
Authority
317
Setting Options Description
Shared Folder File
Management
Automatic File Deletion Select On to enable automatic file
deletion
Period Until Deletion Select the time period for deletion in
hours or days
Apply to All Shared Folders Applies the automatic deletion setting to
all shared folders
Personal Folder File
Management
Automatic File Deletion Select On to enable automatic file
deletion
Period Until Deletion Select the time period for deletion in
hours or days
Additional Action Delete File after Output Select On to automatically delete a file
after it is printed
Access Control Specify whether to Allow or Not Allow
access control, then assign authority
rights.
Search Options Begins with Allows you to set the search parameters
for documents in the folder.
Ends with Searches for documents that end with a
specific phrase
Includes Searches for documents that include a
specific phrase
Access from WebConfig Allowed Select options for accessing Web Config
Allowed when Logged in
Not Allowed
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel Menus
User Settings Menu
Select > General Settings > User Settings to customize various user settings.
318
Setting Description
User Settings
(all models except SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Select the paper feed method and other options for
printing from the folder; available only when a
network folder is configured
User Settings
(SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM only)
Select the settings for scanning, copying, and
printing from the folder
• Scan to Network Folder/FTP
• Scan to Email
• Scan to Memory Device
• Scan to Storage
• Copy Settings
• Network Folder
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel Menus
System Administration Menu
Select > General Settings > System Administration to configure security settings and update
firmware.
319
Setting Options Description
Contacts Manager
(SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM
only)
Add/Edit/Delete Lets you add, edit, or delete
scanning email and network
folder/FTP contacts.
Frequent Registers frequently used
contacts for easy access.
Print Contacts Prints a list of all contacts, email
contacts, or network folder/FTP
contacts.
View Options Selects whether to display
contacts in Tile View or List
View.
Search Options Determines the criteria to use
when searching for contacts.
320
Setting Options Description
Security Settings Restrictions See the Restrictions table
below.
Access Control Allows administrators to grant
access to functions to specific
user accounts. Accounts must be
set up in advance through the
Web Config interface. See the
Administrator's Guide for
instructions on creating user
accounts.
Accept Unknown User Jobs Set to On to allow print jobs from
unknown users.
Admin Settings Lets you add or change the
administrator password. If you
choose to add a password, set
the Lock Setting to On to enable
password entry for certain
features and settings.
Password Encryption Sets an encryption key; select
Encryption Key Backup to back
up the encryption key.
Audit Log Select On to save a notification
log.
321
Setting Options Description
Format the Optional Storage
Unit
(available on all models except
SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
— Displayed when the SSD unit is
connected.
Secure (Quick): Uses a text
pattern to randomly overwrite the
entire hard disk.
Secure (Sanitizing): Overwrites
and checks 00/FF/random data
using an algorithm that complies
with the U.S. Department of
Defense Standards (DoD5220-
22m). This option takes longer
than the others to finish
formatting, however it does
provide the securest method of
erasing data. Select this when
you need to erase confidential
data.
Format the Storage
(SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM
only)
Disable the Optional Storage
Unit
(available on all models except
SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
— Displayed when the optional SSD
unit is connected; select to
remove the SSD unit.
Restore Default Settings Network Settings Select Yes to restore all network
settings to their defaults.
Copy Settings
(SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM
only)
Select Yes to restore all copy
settings to their defaults.
Scan Settings
(SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM
only)
Select Yes to restore all scan
settings to their defaults.
Clear All Data and Settings Select Yes to restore all settings
to their defaults (except
date/time, length unit, and
language settings).
Firmware Update Update Updates to the latest firmware.
322
Restrictions
When Lock Setting is enabled, the following settings can be enabled or disabled individually.
Setting Description
Job log access Allow users to view the job log.
Access to Register/Delete Contacts Allows users to register new contacts or edit and
delete existing contacts.
Access to Recent of Scan to Email Controls the display of the recent Scan to Email
entries.
Access to Show Sent History of Scan to Email Controls the display of the Scan to Email history
list of entries.
Access to Language Allows users to change the display language on
the control panel.
Access to Thick Paper Allows users to access the Thick Paper settings.
Protection of Personal Data Controls the display of potentially sensitive contact
information (such as IP addresses) for non-
administrators. When enabled, displays hidden
information as ****.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel Menus
Related tasks
Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel
Accessing the Web Config Utility
Maintenance Menu
Select > Maintenance to run nozzle checks, cleaning cycles, and other maintenance operations.
Caution: Follow the instructions in the topic links below the table to use these menu settings correctly.
Setting Description
Print Head Nozzle Check Prints a nozzle check pattern so you can check for clogged
nozzles
Print Head Cleaning Perform if the nozzle check pattern has faint or missing areas
323
Setting Description
Power Cleaning* Perform if the nozzle check pattern still has faint or missing
areas after performing a head cleaning three times in a row
Remove Paper Removes any scraps of paper remaining inside the printer
Ink Cartridge(s) Replacement Displays the amount of ink remaining and the model number
for the ink cartridge
Select How To... to view the replacement procedure on the
LCD screen.
Replace Maintenance Box Displays the amount of free space remaining and the model
number of the selected maintenance box
Select How To... to view the replacement procedure on the
LCD screen.
Replace Auto Cutter Blade Select How To... to view the replacement procedure on the
LCD screen.
Adjust Cut Position Adjust the position of the cutter between -3.0 to 3.0 mm
Cleaning the Maintenance Parts Select Wiping the Print Head to manually clean the print
head or Wiping around the Cap to manually clean the area
around the caps and press Start to move the print head to the
cleaning position.
Keeping Preparation* Perform if you are transporting or storing the printer in 14°F
(–10°C) or lower temperatures. Follow the prompts to eject the
ink. The printer turns off automatically after the procedure.
*The Power Cleaning and Keeping Preparation settings can be locked by an administrator. If you
cannot access or change these settings, contact your administrator for assistance.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel Menus
Related tasks
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Discharging Ink
Replacing the Cutter
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Replacing the Maintenance Box
324
Replacing the Borderless Maintenance Boxes
Running a Power Cleaning Using the Product Control Panel
Wiping Around the Print Head
Cleaning the Print Head Cap Area
Printer Status Menu
Select > Printer Status/Print to view current printer and network settings.
Setting Description
Print Status Sheet Prints a summary of current printer settings
Firmware Version Displays the firmware version for the printer and
any optional accessories connected to it
Optional storage unit
(available on all models except for SureColor
T5770DM/T7770DM)
Displays the connection status for the SSD unit
Storage
(SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM models only)
Adobe PS3 Expansion Unit
(available only on models with Adobe Embedded
Print Engine)
Displays the connection status for the Adobe
Embedded Print Engine
Platen Gap Value for Last Print Job Prints the current network connection information
Network Displays current communication status and
connection settings for wired, Wi-Fi, and Wi-Fi
Direct. You can also print a Status Sheet.
Fatal Error Log Displays the codes and dates for past printer
errors
Operation Report Check operation reports from the total amount of
fed media or the total number of carriage passes
Custom Make custom settings for scanning, copying, and
printing from folders
325
Setting Description
User Settings
(available on all models except for SureColor
T5770DM/T7770DM)
Select the paper feed method and other options for
printing from the folder; available only when a
network folder is configured
Authentication Device Status Displays the connection status of the
authentication device; available only when an
authentication device is configured
Epson Open Platform Information Displays the Epson Open Platform version and
product key; available only when Open Platform is
configured
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel Menus
326
Replacing Consumables
When the notification icon appears above an ink color on the LCD screen, the ink color is low or
expended. If one of the installed ink cartridges or ink supply units (ink packs) is expended, printing
cannot be performed until the expended ink is replaced. If an ink cartridge or ink pack is expended while
printing, the print job will stop and you can continue printing after replacing the ink.
If you proceed to print with an ink cartridge or ink pack that is running low, you may be required to
replace the ink while the print job is still in progress. If you have to install a new ink cartridge or ink pack
during a print job, colors in your printout may look different depending on how the ink dries. To avoid this,
Epson recommends that you replace any low ink cartridges or ink packs with new ones before printing
large jobs. The removed ink can be reinstalled later and used until the remaining ink is expended.
The maintenance box stores ink that gets flushed from the system during print head cleaning. If a
message appears or the notification icon appears above a maintenance box icon on the LCD screen,
the amount of available space in the maintenance box is low. When a maintenance box is full, you need
to replace it.
Note: Please dispose of your used Epson branded ink cartridges and maintenance boxes responsibly
and in accordance with local requirements. If you would like to return your used ink cartridges and
maintenance boxes to Epson for proper disposal, please go to epson.com/recycle for more information.
Ink Safety Precautions
Check Ink and Maintenance Box Status
Purchase Epson Ink and Maintenance Box
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Removing and Installing Ink Supply Units (Ink Packs)
Replacing the Maintenance Box
Replacing the Borderless Maintenance Boxes
Ink Safety Precautions
Follow these guidelines as you handle the ink and maintenance boxes.
Ink Cartridge Handling Precautions
• Keep ink cartridges out of the reach of children and do not drink the ink.
• When using the installation ink cartridges included with the printer, most of the ink is consumed during
initial ink charging. Be sure to have replacement cartridges handy.
327
• Store ink cartridges at room temperature, out of direct sunlight, and use them before the expiration
date printed on the packaging.
• Allow ink cartridges that have been stored at low temperatures for an extended period of time to return
to room temperature over a period of four hours.
• To ensure print quality, use ink cartridges within one year of installing them.
• Epson recommends that you remove and shake the installed ink cartridges once every six months to
ensure good print quality.
• Do not shake the ink cartridges too hard, otherwise ink may leak.
• The green IC chip on each ink cartridge retains a variety of cartridge-related information, such as the
ink cartridge status, so that the cartridge may be removed and reinserted freely. Do not touch the
green IC chip on the ink cartridges. This may prevent normal operation and printing.
• Install ink cartridges in all the ink cartridge slots. You cannot print if any of the slots are empty.
• Do not leave the printer without ink cartridges installed. The ink in the printer will dry out and the printer
will not function as expected. Leave ink cartridges in all slots even when you are not using the printer.
• If you remove an ink cartridge for later use, protect the ink supply area from dirt and dust and store it in
the same environment as the product. Note that there is a valve in the ink supply port, making covers
or plugs unnecessary, but care is needed to prevent the ink from staining items that the cartridge
touches. Do not touch the ink cartridge ink supply port or surrounding area.
• Dried ink on the supply port may cause ink leaks when the cartridge is reinserted and used. Wipe off
any excess ink before reinserting.
• Do not dismantle or alter ink cartridges. This could damage the print head and may prevent the
product from printing properly.
• Do not drop ink cartridges or subject them to impacts, otherwise ink may leak.
• The ink cartridges may contain recycled materials; this does not affect printer functions or
performance.
• To maintain the quality of the print head, this product stops printing before ink cartridges are
completely expended.
• If ink gets on your skin, wash it thoroughly with soap and water. If ink gets into your eyes, flush them
immediately with water. If discomfort or vision problems persist, see a doctor immediately. If ink gets
into your mouth, spit it out and see a doctor right away.
• Epson's warranties do not extend to any damage caused by the use of third-party ink or ink not
designed for your printer.
328
Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack) Handling Precautions
• Keep ink packs out of the reach of children. Do not allow children to drink from or handle the ink packs.
• Store ink packs at room temperature out of direct sunlight.
• To ensure print quality, Epson recommends using ink packs either within one year of installing them,
or before the expiration date printed on the packaging, whichever occurs first.
• Allow ink packs that have been stored at low temperatures for an extended period of time to return to
room temperature over a period of four hours.
• The green IC chip on each ink pack retains a variety of ink-related information, such as the ink level,
so that the pack may be removed and reinserted freely. Do not touch the green IC chip on the ink
packs. This may prevent normal operation and printing.
• Install ink packs for all colors. You cannot print unless all colors are installed.
• Do not leave the printer without ink packs installed. The ink in the printer will dry out and the printer will
not function as expected. Leave ink packs for all colors installed even when the printer is not in use.
• If you remove an ink pack for later use, protect the ink supply area from dirt and dust and store it in the
same environment as the product. Note that there is a valve in the ink supply port, making covers or
plugs unnecessary, but care is needed to prevent the ink from staining items that the ink pack touches.
Do not touch the ink supply port or surrounding area.
• Dried ink on the supply port may cause ink leaks when the ink pack is reinserted and used. Wipe off
any excess ink before reinserting.
• Do not dismantle or alter ink packs. This could damage the print head and may prevent the product
from printing properly.
• Do not drop ink packs or subject them to impacts, otherwise ink may leak.
• The ink packs may contain recycled materials; this does not affect printer functions or performance.
• To maintain the quality of the print head, this product stops printing before ink packs are completely
expended.
• If ink gets on your skin, wash it thoroughly with soap and water. If ink gets into your eyes, flush them
immediately with water. If discomfort or vision problems persist, see a doctor immediately. If ink gets
into your mouth, spit it out and see a doctor right away.
• Be careful not to touch any ink when you handle the ink packs.
• Even when the printer is not in use, some ink will be consumed for all colors by head cleaning and
other maintenance operations needed to keep the head in good condition.
• If ink spills, wipe it up immediately. To prevent the ink from spreading, blot the spill with a dry cloth,
then wipe it with a damp cloth. The ink will be hard to remove once it has dried.
329
Maintenance Box Safety Precautions
• Keep maintenance boxes out of the reach of children. Do not allow children to drink from or handle the
maintenance boxes.
• Do not reuse maintenance boxes that have been removed from the printer and exposed to the air for a
long period of time. The box will not absorb any more ink.
• Do not disassemble the maintenance box; otherwise ink may get into your eyes or on your skin.
• Do not touch the chip on the side of the maintenance box or you may prevent normal operation and
printing.
• Be careful not to touch any ink when you handle the maintenance boxes.
• If ink gets on your skin, wash it thoroughly with soap and water. If ink gets into your eyes, flush them
immediately with water. If discomfort or vision problems persist, see a doctor immediately. If ink gets
into your mouth, spit it out and see a doctor right away.
• Do not replace the maintenance box while printing, otherwise ink may leak.
Parent topic: Replacing Consumables
Check Ink and Maintenance Box Status
Your product and its software will let you know when an ink cartridge or ink supply unit (ink pack) is low
or expended, or when a maintenance box needs to be replaced.
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status on the LCD Screen
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status with Windows
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status - Mac
Parent topic: Replacing Consumables
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status on the LCD Screen
You can check the status of the ink cartridges or ink packs and maintenance boxes from the product
control panel. If the icon appears on an ink color or a maintenance box, you need to replace it soon.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
330
2. Check the ink color icons at the bottom of the home screen.
Note: The displayed ink and maintenance box levels are approximate.
Note: The appearance of the screen may differ from the one shown, depending on your model.
Parent topic: Check Ink and Maintenance Box Status
Related tasks
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Replacing the Maintenance Box
Replacing the Borderless Maintenance Boxes
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status with Windows
You can check your ink or maintenance box status at any time using a utility on your Windows computer.
1. To check your status, access the Windows Desktop and click the icon for your product in the right
side of the Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and click . Then click your product name.
331
You see a screen like this:
Note: The appearance of the screen may differ from the one shown, depending on your model and
driver version.
2. Replace or reinstall the ink color or maintenance box as indicated on the screen.
Note: If any of the inks installed in the product are broken, incompatible with the product model, or
improperly installed, Epson Status Monitor will not display an accurate ink status.
Parent topic: Check Ink and Maintenance Box Status
Related tasks
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Replacing the Maintenance Box
Replacing the Borderless Maintenance Boxes
332
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status - Mac
You can check the status of your ink and maintenance boxes using a utility on your Mac.
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings. Select Print &
Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options & Supplies.
Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
2. Select EPSON Status Monitor.
You see this window:
3. Do the following as necessary:
• You can update the ink and maintenance box status by clicking Update.
• Replace or reinstall the maintenance box or any ink color as indicated on the screen.
Note: If any of the inks installed in the product are broken, incompatible with the product model, or
improperly installed, Epson Status Monitor will not display an accurate ink status.
Parent topic: Check Ink and Maintenance Box Status
Related tasks
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
333
Replacing the Maintenance Box
Replacing the Borderless Maintenance Boxes
Purchase Epson Ink and Maintenance Box
U.S. and Canada:
You can purchase genuine Epson ink, maintenance boxes, and paper at epson.com (U.S. sales) or
epson.ca (Canadian sales). You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized reseller. To find
the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada.
Latin America:
You can purchase genuine Epson ink, maintenance boxes, and paper from an Epson authorized
reseller. To find the nearest reseller, visit latin.epson.com or call your nearest Epson sales office.
Note: This product is designed to work with genuine Epson inks. Non-Epson ink or any other ink not
specified for this printer could cause damage not covered by Epson's warranties.
Ink and Maintenance Box Part Numbers
Parent topic: Replacing Consumables
Related references
Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)
Where to Get Help (Latin America)
Ink and Maintenance Box Part Numbers
Use the part numbers shown for your model when you order or purchase a new ink cartridge, ink pack,
or maintenance box.
Note: This product is designed to work with genuine Epson inks. Non-Epson ink or any other ink not
specified for this printer could cause damage not covered by Epson's warranties.
Ink Cartridges
Ink color 110 ml 350 ml 700 ml
SureColor P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E/P8570D
Photo Black T49A120 T48S120 T48L120
Cyan T49A220 T48S220 T48L220
334
Ink color 110 ml 350 ml 700 ml
Magenta T49A320 T48S320 T48L320
Yellow T49A420 T48S420 T48L420
Matte Black T49A820 T48S820 T48L820
Gray T49AE20 T48SE20 T48LE20
SureColor T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E/T5770D/T5770DM/T7770D/T7770DM
Photo Black T51A120 T50S120 T50L120
Cyan T51A220 T50S220 T50L220
Magenta T51A320 T50S320 T50L320
Yellow T51A420 T50S420 T50L420
Matte Black T51A820 T50S820 T50L820
Red T51AF20 T50SF20 T50LF20
Ink Supply Units (Ink Packs)
Ink color 1600 ml
SureColor P8570DL
Photo Black T53E120
Cyan T53E220
Magenta T53E320
Yellow T53E420
Matte Black T53E820
Gray T53E720
SureColor T7770DL
Photo Black T52Y120
Cyan T52Y220
Magenta T52Y320
Yellow T52Y420
335
Ink color 1600 ml
Matte Black T52Y820
Red T52Y920
Maintenance box part number: C13S210115
Borderless maintenance box part number: C13S210116
Parent topic: Purchase Epson Ink and Maintenance Box
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Make sure you have your replacement cartridges handy before you begin. You must install new
cartridges immediately after removing the old ones. Replace all expended ink cartridges. You cannot
print if any of the ink cartridges are expended or any ink slots are empty.
Note: You can view the replacement procedure on the LCD screen. Select > Maintenance > Ink
Cartridge(s) Replacement > How To....
Note: This product is designed to work with genuine Epson inks. Non-Epson ink or any other ink not
specified for this printer could cause damage not covered by Epson's warranties.
For SureColor
P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E/P8570D/T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E/T5770D/T5770DM/T7770D/T7770DM
models only.
1. Turn on your product.
2. Open the ink cover.
336
3. Place your finger in the groove at the top of the ink cartridge and pull it out.
Note: Used ink cartridges may have ink around the ink supply port, so be careful not to get any ink
on the surrounding area when removing the cartridges. Dispose of used cartridges carefully. Do not
take the used cartridge apart or try to refill it.
Warning: If ink gets on your skin, wash it thoroughly with soap and water. If ink gets into your eyes,
flush them immediately with water. If ink gets into your mouth, spit it out and see a doctor right away.
Keep ink cartridges out of the reach of children.
4. Remove the new cartridge from the package.
Caution: Do not touch the areas on the ink cartridge shown below.
337
5. Gently shake the cartridge for 10 seconds, or about 30 times, in approximately 4 inch (10 cm)
horizontal movements.
6. Insert the new cartridge into the corresponding ink slot and push it in firmly.
7. Repeat the above steps for any other cartridge that needs to be replaced.
Note: Make sure to install ink cartridges into all slots. You cannot print if any of the slots are empty.
338
8. Close the ink cover.
Your product begins charging the ink delivery system. A message appears on the LCD screen when ink
replacement is complete.
Note: Do not open any covers or turn off the product during ink charging.
Caution: If you remove an ink cartridge for later use, protect the ink supply area from dirt and dust and
store it in the same environment as the printer. The valve in the ink supply port is designed to contain
any excess ink, but do not touch the ink supply port or surrounding area. Always store ink cartridges with
the label facing up; do not store cartridges upside-down.
Parent topic: Replacing Consumables
Related concepts
Purchase Epson Ink and Maintenance Box
Related references
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts (U.S./Canada)
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts (Latin America)
339
Removing and Installing Ink Supply Units (Ink Packs)
Make sure you have your replacement ink packs handy before you begin. You must install new ink packs
immediately after removing the old ones. Replace all expended ink packs. You cannot print if any of the
ink packs are expended or any ink slots are empty.
Caution: Keep the ink packs out of the reach of children and do not drink the ink.
Note: To view the replacement procedure on the LCD screen, select > Maintenance > Ink
Cartridge(s) Replacement > How To....
Note: This product is designed to work with genuine Epson inks. Non-Epson ink or any other ink not
specified for this printer could cause damage not covered by Epson's warranties.
For SureColor P8570DL/T7770DL models only.
1. Turn on your product.
2. Slide the lock switch to the right to unlock the ink tray.
340
3. Pull the ink tray out of the ink slot with both hands.
Note: Used ink packs may have ink around the ink supply port, so be careful not to get any ink on
the surrounding area when removing the ink packs. Dispose of used ink packs carefully. Do not take
the used ink pack apart or try to refill it.
Warning: If ink gets on your skin, wash it thoroughly with soap and water. If ink gets into your eyes,
flush them immediately with water. If ink gets into your mouth, spit it out and see a doctor right away.
Keep ink cartridges out of the reach of children.
4. Lift the expended ink pack out of the tray.
341
Caution: Do not touch the areas on the ink pack shown below.
5. Insert the new ink pack into the tray and push it down as shown.
Caution: Make sure the ink pack fits onto the pegs and is aligned with the top of the tray.
342
6. While the ink pack is in the tray, carefully shake it by tilting it up and down at about a 60 degree
angle for approximately 10 seconds, or about 10 times.
7. Match the color on the ink pack label with the color slot on the printer, then insert the ink tray into the
slot and push it in firmly.
Note: The ink packs are keyed to fit into the correct color slot. If you cannot insert the ink tray all the
way, do not force it. Make sure the ink pack color matches the color slot on the printer.
343
8. Slide the lock switch to the left to lock the ink tray.
9. Repeat the above steps for any other ink pack that needs to be replaced.
Note: Install ink trays in all of the slots. You cannot print if any of the slots are empty.
10. Follow the instructions on the LCD screen to begin ink charging.
Your product begins charging the ink delivery system. A message appears on the LCD screen when ink
replacement is complete.
Note: Do not turn off the printer, load paper, or open any covers while the printer is charging or you'll
waste ink.
Parent topic: Replacing Consumables
Replacing the Maintenance Box
The maintenance box stores ink that gets flushed from the system during maintenance operations such
as head cleaning. Replace the maintenance box when you see a message on the LCD screen.
Note: Do not replace the maintenance box while printing, otherwise ink may leak.
344
1. Check the LCD screen to determine which maintenance box needs to be replaced.
Note: To view the replacement procedure on the LCD screen, press > Maintenance > Replace
Maintenance Box > Maintenance Box > How To....
2. Remove the new maintenance box from the package.
Caution: Do not touch the chip on the side of the maintenance box or you may prevent normal
operation and printing.
Note: Do not reuse a maintenance box you have removed from the printer and exposed to air for a
long period of time. The box will not absorb any more ink.
3. Open the maintenance box cover.
345
4. Use the handle on the maintenance box to carefully pull it out of the product without tilting the box.
Warning: If ink gets on your skin, wash it thoroughly with soap and water. If ink gets into your eyes,
flush them immediately with water. If ink gets into your mouth, spit it out and see a doctor right away.
5. Place the used maintenance box in the bag supplied with the new box and seal the bag.
Note: Do not tilt the maintenance box until the bag is firmly sealed, otherwise ink may leak.
346
6. Insert the new maintenance box in the slot and push it in firmly.
7. Close the maintenance box cover.
Note: Dispose of the used maintenance box carefully.
Parent topic: Replacing Consumables
Related concepts
Purchase Epson Ink and Maintenance Box
Related references
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts (U.S./Canada)
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts (Latin America)
347
Replacing the Borderless Maintenance Boxes
The borderless maintenance boxes absorb ink during borderless printing. When you see a message on
the LCD screen, replace the borderless maintenance box indicated.
Note: Do not replace the borderless maintenance box while printing, otherwise ink may leak.
Note: The illustrations in this section may differ slightly from your product, but the steps are the same
unless noted otherwise.
1. Check the LCD screen to determine which maintenance box needs to be replaced.
Note: To view the replacement procedure on the LCD screen, press > Maintenance > Replace
Maintenance Box > Borderless Maintenance Box > How To....
2. Remove the new borderless maintenance box from the package.
Caution: Do not touch the chip on the borderless maintenance box or you may prevent normal
operation and printing.
Note: Do not reuse a borderless maintenance box you have removed from the printer and exposed
to air for a long period of time. The box will not absorb any more ink.
348
3. Lift up the paper support lock lever, then move the paper support down to position A (the lowest
position) as shown.
4. Extend the paper output flap as shown.
349
5. With the paper output flap extended, lift up the paper support lock lever, then move the paper
support up to position C (the highest position) as shown.
6. Pull out the borderless maintenance box carefully without tilting it.
Note: The location of the borderless maintenance box varies slightly depending on the model.
7. Place the used borderless maintenance box in the bag supplied with the new box and seal the bag.
Note: Do not tilt the borderless maintenance box until the bag is firmly sealed, otherwise ink may
leak.
350
8. Carefully insert the new borderless maintenance box and push it in firmly.
9. Lift up the paper support lock lever, then move the paper support down to position A (the lowest
position) as shown.
10. Close the paper output flap.
Note: Dispose of the used borderless maintenance box carefully.
352
Adjusting Print Quality
If your print quality declines, you may need to run a utility to clean or align the print head.
If running these utilities does not solve the problem, you may need to replace the ink cartridges or ink
packs, clean the roll paper feeder, or run a Power Cleaning.
Note: Your product may differ from the images in this section, but the instructions are the same unless
otherwise noted.
Print Head Maintenance
Cleaning the Roll Paper Feeder
Print Head Maintenance
Print head maintenance ensures the best print quality.
Perform the following maintenance functions as necessary:
• Auto Cleaning: Set the printer to automatically check for clogged nozzles and perform cleaning if
clogged nozzles are detected. You can change the timing for the nozzle check or set to Off if you do
not want to perform auto cleaning.
• Print Head Nozzle Check: Check for clogged nozzles before each print job or if you have not used
the printer for an extended period of time. Inspect the printed check pattern and clean the print head if
you notice faint or missing areas.
• Print Head Cleaning: Clean the print head if you notice faint areas or gaps in your printouts.
• Ruled Line Alignment: Adjust the position of the print head if your printouts are grainy or out of focus.
• Paper Feed Adjust: Adjust the paper feed if you are unable to resolve banding issues even after
cleaning and aligning the print head.
Print Head Nozzle Check
Print Head Cleaning
Adjusting the Paper Feed Using the Product Control Panel
Ruled Line Alignment
Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality
Related tasks
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
353
Print Head Nozzle Check
You can print a nozzle check pattern to check for clogged nozzles.
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility
Parent topic: Print Head Maintenance
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
You can check the print head nozzles using the control panel on your product.
1. Make sure roll paper or cut sheet paper is loaded in the printer.
2. Make sure the correct paper type is selected.
3. Select > Maintenance > Print Head Nozzle Check.
4. Select Start.
The nozzle check pattern prints.
5. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines.
Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning
6. Do one of the following:
• If there are no gaps, select O to exit.
• If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, select X to perform head cleaning.
7. Follow the instructions on the screen to clean the print head, check the nozzles, and repeat the
process as necessary.
Parent topic: Print Head Nozzle Check
Related references
Maintenance Menu
354
Related tasks
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Running a Power Cleaning Using the Product Control Panel
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility
You can check the print head nozzles using a utility on your Windows or Mac computer.
1. Load roll or cut sheet paper in the printer.
2. Make sure the correct paper type is selected.
3. Do one of the following:
• Windows: Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right
side of the Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click , select Properties or
Printing preferences, and click on the Utility tab.
• Mac: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select Print & Fax, Print &
Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options & Supplies. Select
Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
4. Click Print Head Nozzle Check.
5. Click Print.
The nozzle pattern prints.
6. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines.
Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning
7. If there are no gaps, click Finish.
If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, perform head cleaning.
Parent topic: Print Head Nozzle Check
355
Related references
Maintenance Menu
Related tasks
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility
Running a Power Cleaning Using the Product Control Panel
Print Head Cleaning
If print quality has declined and the nozzle check pattern indicates clogged nozzles, you can clean the
print head. Use the nozzle check pattern to determine which colors need cleaning. You can save ink by
cleaning only selected colors (control panel only).
Note: You cannot clean the print head if an ink cartridge is expended, and may not be able to clean it
when a cartridge is low. You must replace the cartridge first.
Your printer automatically checks the print head nozzles when the printer is turned on and before
printing; and cleans them when it detects clogged nozzles. To change this setting, select General
Settings > Printer Settings > Auto Cleaning.
Note: When Auto Cleaning is enabled, the nozzles are checked after head cleaning and, if clogging is
detected, auto cleaning is performed. Depending on the status of the nozzles, this process can take up
to 32 minutes.
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility
Running a Power Cleaning Using the Product Control Panel
Parent topic: Print Head Maintenance
Related references
Environmental Specifications
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
You can clean the print head using the control panel on your product.
1. Load roll or cut sheet paper in the printer.
2. Make sure the correct paper type is selected.
3. Select > Maintenance > Print Head Cleaning.
356
4. Select the color pairs with faint or missing segments in the check pattern, then select OK to start the
cleaning cycle.
Note: A typical head cleaning cycle takes about 4 to 10 minutes. The more color pairs selected, the
longer it takes to perform cleaning. Depending on the status of the nozzles and the Auto Clean Max
Repeat setting, this function can take up to 28 minutes.
When the cleaning cycle is finished, a confirmation screen appears.
Caution: Never turn off the product during a cleaning cycle or you may damage it.
5. Select Yes to print a nozzle check pattern.
6. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines.
Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning
7. Follow the instructions on the screen to clean the print head, check the nozzles, and repeat the
process as necessary.
If you don’t see any improvement after cleaning the print head several times, run a Power Cleaning.
Parent topic: Print Head Cleaning
Related references
Maintenance Menu
Environmental Specifications
Related tasks
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Running a Power Cleaning Using the Product Control Panel
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
357
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility
You can clean the print head using a utility on your Windows computer or Mac.
1. Load roll or cut sheet paper in the printer.
2. Make sure the correct paper type is selected.
3. Do one of the following:
• Windows: Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right
side of the Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click , select Properties or
Printing preferences, and click on the Utility tab.
• In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or
Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options & Supplies. Select Utility and
select Open Printer Utility.
4. Select Print Head Cleaning and choose one of the following cleaning methods:
• Select All Colors if you want to clean all of the nozzles.
• Select Auto Select if you want the printer to automatically perform print head cleaning only when
clogged nozzles are detected. If no clogged nozzles are detected, print head cleaning is not
performed.
5. Click Start to begin the cleaning cycle.
The power light begins flashing. When the cleaning cycle is finished, the power light stops flashing
and a confirmation screen appears.
Note: A typical head cleaning cycle takes about 4 to 9 minutes. When Auto Cleaning is set to On,
the nozzles are checked after head cleaning, and if clogging is detected, auto cleaning is performed.
Depending on the status of the nozzles and the Auto Clean Max Repeat setting, this function can
take up to 32 minutes.
Caution: Never turn off the product during a cleaning cycle or you may damage it.
6. Click Print Head Nozzle Check.
7. Click OK.
The nozzle pattern prints.
8. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines.
Print head is clean
358
Print head needs cleaning
9. Follow the instructions on the screen to clean the print head, check the nozzles, and repeat the
process as necessary.
If you don’t see any improvement after cleaning the print head several times, run a Power Cleaning.
Parent topic: Print Head Cleaning
Related references
Maintenance Menu
Environmental Specifications
Related tasks
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Running a Power Cleaning Using the Product Control Panel
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Running a Power Cleaning Using the Product Control Panel
If print head nozzles are still clogged after cleaning the print head several times, run the Power
Cleaning utility from the product control panel. This process consumes a lot of ink to clean the clogged
nozzles.
1. Load roll or cut sheet paper in the printer.
2. Make sure the correct paper type is selected.
3. Select > Maintenance > Power Cleaning.
4. Select the nozzle pairs you want to clean and select OK to begin the power cleaning cycle.
Caution: Never turn off the product during a cleaning cycle or you may damage it.
Note: Depending on nozzle status and the number of pairs selected, the power cleaning cycle can
take up to 28 minutes.
359
5. Select Yes to print a nozzle check pattern.
The nozzle pattern prints.
6. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines.
Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning
If nozzles are still clogged, turn off the printer and leave it off overnight. If nozzles are still clogged,
contact Epson for support.
Parent topic: Print Head Cleaning
Related tasks
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility
Adjusting the Paper Feed Using the Product Control Panel
If your printouts are grainy or blurry, or you still see dark or light horizontal bands, you may need to
adjust the paper feed using the product control panel.
1. Load roll paper or cut sheet paper in the printer.
Note: Load paper that is at least 13.3 inches wide by 21.9 inches long (338 mm × 558 mm).
2. Make sure the correct paper type is selected.
Note: If you are using commercially available paper, make sure you create the custom paper
settings in advance.
3. Select > Paper Setting > paper source > Print Adjustments > Paper Feed Adjust.
360
4. Select one of the following:
• Auto: automatically adjusts the paper feed setting (takes 9 to 35 minutes to complete); Epson
recommends running this option first.
• Manual: if automatic adjustment results are not satisfactory and you want to perform adjustments
based on specific printing needs, select an adjustment setting from the following:
• Quality First: prints adjustment patterns to adjust the feed for image quality
• Length Accuracy First: prints measurement positions to adjust the feed for images that require
more precise dimensions and length, such as CAD files
Note: You will need a 24-inch (610 mm) ruler that can measure in 0.5 mm increments to
perform the adjustment.
5. Select Start to print an adjustment pattern.
6. Depending on your adjustment selection, do one of the following:
• Quality First: Follow the instructions on the LCD screen to select the best patterns for the first set
of adjustment patterns and select OK.
After the second set of adjustment patterns prints, repeat the process.
• Length Accuracy First: Use a ruler that can measure in 0.5 mm increments to measure the
registration marks. Enter the measurement on the LCD screen and select OK.
The screen displays a confirmation message and returns to the home screen.
Parent topic: Print Head Maintenance
Ruled Line Alignment
If your printouts become grainy or blurry, you notice misalignment of vertical lines, or you see dark or
light horizontal bands, you may need to align the print head.
Before you align the print head, note the following:
• Alignment varies depending on the loaded media. Align the print head using the media on which you
want to print and select the paper type that matches the paper in the printer. When adjusting using
non-Epson paper, make sure you register the custom paper in advance.
• Run a nozzle check before you align the print head. If there are any gaps in the nozzle check pattern,
clean the print head.
• Manually align the print head on any transparent or colored paper or on these paper types: Plain
paper, Epson Enhanced Matte Poster Board.
361
• Make sure no direct sunlight enters the printer, or the alignment pattern may not be read correctly.
Aligning the Print Head Automatically Using the Product Control Panel
Aligning the Print Head Manually Using the Product Control Panel
Parent topic: Print Head Maintenance
Related concepts
Print Head Nozzle Check
Aligning the Print Head Automatically Using the Product Control Panel
You can automatically align the print head using the control panel on your product. Make sure no direct
sunlight enters the printer, or the alignment pattern may not be read correctly.
Note: You must manually align the print head when you are using any transparent or colored paper or on
these paper types: Plain paper, Epson Enhanced Matte Poster Board.
1. Load roll paper or cut sheet paper in the printer.
Note: Load paper that is at least 15.2 × 21.9 inches (388 × 558 mm) or larger.
2. Make sure the correct paper type is selected.
Note: If you are using commercially available paper, make sure you create the custom paper
settings in advance.
3. Select > paper source > Paper Setting > Print Adjustments > Ruled Line Alignment from the
product control panel.
4. Select one of the following:
• Auto (Standard): if printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are grainy or otherwise
unsatisfactory (takes 9 to 35 minutes to complete)
• Auto (Details): if printed ruled lines are misaligned at the edge of the paper or standard automatic
alignment results are unsatisfactory (takes 9 to 35 minutes to complete)
The sensor reads the adjustment pattern and automatically aligns the print head.
Note: Do not open the front cover or turn off the printer during the alignment process.
5. After the alignment is complete, check the results.
362
If the print head still seems misaligned, select a different alignment method and repeat the process. If the
print results are still not satisfactory, adjust the print head position manually.
Parent topic: Ruled Line Alignment
Related tasks
Aligning the Print Head Manually Using the Product Control Panel
Loading Roll 1/Roll Paper
Loading Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Loading Cut Sheets
Loading Poster Board
Creating Custom Paper Settings
Aligning the Print Head Manually Using the Product Control Panel
If you cannot run an automatic print head alignment on your paper or automatic alignment does not
correct the problem, you can manually align the print head using the control panel on your product.
1. Load roll paper or cut sheet paper in the printer.
Note: Load paper that is at least this size or larger: A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]).
2. Make sure the correct paper type is selected.
Note: If you are using commercially available paper, make sure you create the custom paper
settings in advance.
3. Select > Paper Setting > Print Adjustments > Ruled Line Alignment.
4. Select one of the following:
• Auto (Standard): if printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are grainy or otherwise
unsatisfactory (takes 9 to 35 minutes to complete)
• Auto (Details): if printed ruled lines are misaligned at the edge of the paper or standard automatic
alignment results are unsatisfactory (takes 9 to 35 minutes to complete)
• Manual (Standard): if automatic alignment results are not satisfactory and you want to precisely
align the print head using the printed adjustment patterns
• Manual (Details): if automatic and standard manual alignment results are not satisfactory and you
want to select custom settings based on specific printing needs
363
The printer prints the first adjustment pattern. If you are printing on cut sheets, load additional sheets
of paper after each pattern is printed.
5. After each alignment pattern is printed, view the LCD screen for instructions on selecting the best
result in each pattern set.
Multiple pattern sets may print, depending on the paper width. If so, check all pattern sets and
average the adjustment value. For example, if two pattern sets print, and the best value for each set
is 0 and 2, the average value would be 1. Enter 1 as the adjustment value. If the average value is not
an integer, round it off to the nearest whole number.
6. After the alignment is complete, check the results.
If the print head still seems misaligned, repeat the process.
Parent topic: Ruled Line Alignment
Related tasks
Aligning the Print Head Automatically Using the Product Control Panel
Loading Roll 1/Roll Paper
Loading Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Loading Cut Sheets
Loading Poster Board
Creating Custom Paper Settings
Cleaning the Roll Paper Feeder
If ink smears when printing on roll paper or cut sheets, you can clean the roll paper feeder using plain
paper to remove excess ink.
1. Load the widest available roll paper in the printer.
2. Select > Paper Setting > Roll 1 (known as Roll on SureColor P6570E/T3770E) or Roll 2, if
applicable > Feed/Cut Paper.
3. Select and press and hold Forward until there are no ink smears on the ejected roll paper.
4. Select Cut to cut the roll paper.
Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality
Related tasks
Loading Roll 1/Roll Paper
Loading Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
364
Maintenance and Transportation
See the instructions in these sections to maintain your printer for optimum results, or to move or
transport your printer.
Replacing the Cutter
Cleaning Your Product
Cleaning the Platen and Borderless Pad Edges
Wiping Around the Print Head
Cleaning the Print Head Cap Area
Moving or Transporting Your Product
Replacing the Cutter
If you notice that your paper does not cut cleanly, you may need to replace the cutter. You will need a
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Caution: Store the replacement cutter out of the reach of children. Do not remove the protective material
from the new cutter until instructed to do so. Do not drop the cutter or knock it against anything or you
may chip the blade.
1. Remove all paper from the printer.
2. Select the Menu icon.
3. Select Maintenance > Replace Auto cutter blade > Start.
The cutter moves to the replacement position.
365
4. Open the maintenance cover.
366
5. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to loosen the screw holding the cutter in place and carefully remove
the cutter. Place the cutter in a plastic bag and dispose of it properly.
Warning: Keep the cutter out of the reach of children. The blade is sharp and can cause injury.
367
6. Install the new cutter in the product with the protective material still attached.
7. Tighten the cutter screw securely.
Note: Make sure the screw is tightened securely, otherwise the cut position may be slightly shifted or
skewed.
8. Close the maintenance cover.
9. Select OK.
368
The cutter moves into position and cuts off the protective piece. Remove the protective piece from
the printer.
Parent topic: Maintenance and Transportation
Related references
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts (U.S./Canada)
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts (Latin America)
Cleaning Your Product
You should clean the exterior of your printer about once a month to keep the product in optimum
condition.
Note: Do not use volatile chemicals, such as alcohol or paint thinners, to clean the product.
1. Remove all the paper from the product.
2. Turn off the product, wait for the LCD screen to turn off, and unplug the power cable from the
electrical outlet.
3. Using a soft, clean cloth, wipe off any dust or dirt from the exterior of the product. To prevent dust
from accumulating, make sure to clean the area shown here.
369
Note: For stubborn dirt, dampen the cloth with water mixed with a small amount of neutral detergent.
Wring it out before using it to wipe the product's surface. Dry the product with a soft, lint-free cloth
when you are finished.
Parent topic: Maintenance and Transportation
Cleaning the Platen and Borderless Pad Edges
You should clean the interior of the printer about once a month to prevent ink and paper particles from
accumulating in the printer. Carefully follow the steps here to clean the platen and borderless pad edges
to remove ink, paper particles, and lint.
Caution: If ink remains on these parts, it could transfer to your printouts. Continued use of your product
with ink, paper particles, or lint on these surfaces could damage the print heads or clog the nozzles.
1. Turn off the product, wait for the LCD screen to turn off, and unplug the power cable from the
electrical outlet.
2. Wait for one minute before continuing.
3. Open the front covers.
370
4. Use a soft, lint-free cloth to thoroughly remove dust and dirt from the platen as shown here. Wipe
from the top to the bottom of the platen and do not touch the rollers or ink tubes.
371
Make sure to thoroughly clean the area shown here.
Note: For stubborn dirt, dampen a soft cloth with neutral detergent. Wring it out and clean the platen
as shown above. Dry the platen with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth when you are finished.
372
5. If any paper particles have accumulated in the holes shown here, use a pointed object such as a
toothpick to push the material into the holes.
6. Use cotton swabs to remove any paper particles or dust around the outer edges of the borderless
pads as shown.
373
7. Close the front covers, plug in the power cord, and turn the product back on.
Parent topic: Maintenance and Transportation
Wiping Around the Print Head
If the print head is clogged and automatic cleaning does not fix the issue, you can clean the print head
and the area around the caps using the optional cleaning sticks (part number C13S090013).
Caution: Before beginning the cleaning process, note the following:
• Do not touch any circuit boards or any parts inside the printer besides those which need to be cleaned.
• Always use new cleaning sticks, or dirt may be transferred into the printer.
• Do not touch the tips of the cleaning sticks. This may reduce the cleaning effect.
• Touch a metal object before cleaning to discharge any static electricity.
• Do not use an organic solvent such as alcohol to wipe the caps, as it may damage the print head.
• Do not move the print head by hand. Doing so could damage the printer.
• If paper is loaded in the printer, remove it.
1. On the LCD screen, select > Maintenance > Cleaning the Maintenance Parts > Wiping the
Print Head > Start.
The print head moves to the cleaning position.
374
2. Open the maintenance cover.
3. Use a cleaning stick to wipe around the print head as shown to remove any ink, lint, or dirt.
375
4. Close the maintenance cover.
5. Open the port cover at the back of the printer.
376
6. Open the rear maintenance cover.
7. Use a cleaning stick to wipe around the print head as shown to remove any ink, lint, or dirt.
378
Related tasks
Removing Roll 1/ Roll Paper
Removing Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Cleaning the Print Head Cap Area
If the print head is clogged and automatic cleaning does not fix the issue, you can clean the print head
and the area around the caps using the optional cleaning sticks (part number C13S090013).
Caution: Before beginning the cleaning process, note the following:
• Do not touch any circuit boards or any parts inside the printer besides those which need to be cleaned.
• Always use new cleaning sticks, or dirt may be transferred into the printer.
• Do not touch the tip of the cleaning stick. This may reduce the cleaning effect.
• Touch a metal object before cleaning to discharge any static electricity.
• Do not use an organic solvent such as alcohol to wipe the caps, as it may damage the print head.
• Do not move the print head by hand. Doing so could damage the printer.
• If paper is loaded in the printer, remove it.
1. On the LCD screen, select > Maintenance > Cleaning the Maintenance Parts > Wiping
around the Cap.
The print head moves to the cleaning position.
379
2. Open the printer covers.
3. Remove the protective piece as shown.
380
4. Use a new cleaning stick to clean the drying prevention caps area as shown.
381
Note: Do not press too hard on the area surrounding the caps. Doing so could damage the caps and
may prevent them from functioning properly.
5. Hold the cleaning stick in a vertical position and wipe the inner areas of the drying prevention caps
as shown.
6. Hold the cleaning stick in a vertical position and wipe the outer areas of the drying prevention caps
as shown.
382
7. Hold the cleaning stick in a horizontal position and wipe the edges of the drying prevention caps with
the flat surface as shown.
383
8. Hold the cleaning stick in a vertical position and wipe the guides as shown.
384
9. If there is any lint or dust in the drying prevention caps, remove it with the tip of the cleaning stick or a
pair of tweezers.
385
10. Use a new cleaning stick to wipe any dirt off of the wiper.
11. Wipe around the front of the wiper as shown.
386
12. Wipe around the back of the wiper as shown.
13. Wipe the edges of the wiper as shown.
387
14. Use a new cleaning stick to wipe any dirt off of the suction caps.
15. Hold the cleaning stick in a vertical position and wipe the outer areas of the suction caps as shown.
388
16. Hold the cleaning stick in a horizontal position and wipe the edges of the suction caps with the flat
surface as shown.
389
17. Hold the cleaning stick in a vertical position and wipe the guides shown here.
390
18. If there is any lint or dust in the suction caps, remove it with a cleaning stick or a pair of tweezers.
19. Replace the protective piece as shown.
391
20. Close the printer covers.
21. Select OK to return the print head to its home position.
Parent topic: Maintenance and Transportation
Related tasks
Removing Roll 1/ Roll Paper
Removing Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Moving or Transporting Your Product
If you need to move or transport your product, prepare it as described here. Moving the product assumes
that you are moving it to another location on the same floor, without using elevators, ramps, or stairs. If
you are moving the product between floors or to another building, contact Epson for support.
392
Warning: The product is heavy and requires four or more people to move it. Use only the indicated
locations to lift the product. Otherwise, the product may be damaged or you may be injured.
Caution: During transportation and storage, follow these guidelines:
• Avoid tilting the product more than 10° forward or backward while moving it.
• Leave the ink cartridges installed. Removing the cartridges can dry out the print head and may prevent
the product from printing, or ink may leak.
• Use the casters to move the printer indoors a short distance over a level floor. Do not move the
product with locked casters. Avoid areas with steps or uneven flooring.
393
• If you are transporting or storing the product below 14°F (–10°C), you must discharge the ink. See the
link below for instructions.
• Make sure the print head is capped (the print head is positioned at the far left) before storing the
product. If the print head is left uncapped for a long period of time, the print quality may decline.
Note: Before storing your product for a long period, replace low, expended, or expired ink to help
prevent the print head from drying out. Store your product in a cool, dry place.
1. Remove all the paper from the product.
2. Turn off the product.
3. Unplug the power cable.
4. Disconnect any connected cables.
5. Remove the output tray, if necessary.
6. Close all covers on the product.
7. Unlock the casters on the front of the product.
394
8. Turn the adjustable feet on the back of the product until they no longer tough the floor, then move the
product to the new location.
9. After transporting the product, connect the power cable and turn on the product.
10. Run a print head nozzle check and clean the print head, if necessary.
11. Lock the casters.
395
12. Turn the adjustable feet until they touch the floor. Once the feet touch the floor, do not turn them
more than half a turn (180 degrees) or print quality may decline.
Discharging Ink
Parent topic: Maintenance and Transportation
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Print Head Nozzle Check
Related tasks
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility
Removing Roll 1/ Roll Paper
Removing Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Discharging Ink
If you need to move or transport your product when the temperature is 14 °F (–10 °C) or lower, you must
first discharge the ink to keep the print head in optimum condition.
396
Note: The maintenance box needs enough capacity to discharge the ink. If the remaining capacity is
low, replace the maintenance box first.
1. Turn on the printer.
2. Remove all of the paper from the printer.
3. Select > Maintenance > Keeping Preparation > Start.
The ink begins to discharge. The printer turns off automatically when the discharge process is
complete.
Caution: Do not open any covers or turn off the printer while ink is discharging.
Note: If a message is displayed indicating that you need a new XXX ink cartridge when you resume
using the printer, prepare an ink cartridge or ink pack of the color displayed in the XXX section
before the next time you use the printer. The next time you turn on the printer, ink will fill the print
head nozzles making the printer ready to print; so if you do not have enough ink to fill the nozzles,
the printer will not be ready to use until the ink is replaced.
Parent topic: Moving or Transporting Your Product
Related tasks
Removing Roll 1/ Roll Paper
Removing Roll 2 (Dual Roll Models Only)
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status on the LCD Screen
397
Solving Problems
Check these sections for solutions to problems you may have using your product.
Checking for Software Updates
Product Status Messages
Resetting Control Panel Defaults
Solving Printer Problems
Solving Network Problems
Solving Printing Problems
Solving Paper Problems
Solving Print Quality Problems
Solving Scanning Problems (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Uninstall Your Product Software
Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)
Where to Get Help (Latin America)
Checking for Software Updates
Periodically, it's a good idea to check Epson's support website for free updates to your product software.
Visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America)
and select your product.
• Windows: Your printer software automatically checks for updates. You can also manually update the
software by:
• Accessing the Windows Desktop and right-clicking the icon for your product in the right side of
the Windows taskbar, or clicking the up arrow and right-clicking . Select Software Update.
• Clicking on the Utility tab in the printer settings window and selecting Driver Update
You can also update the software by selecting EPSON Software Updater in the EPSON or EPSON
Software program group, accessible by the Start button, or on the Start or Apps screens, depending
on your version of Windows.
• OS X: You can manually update the software by opening the Applications > Epson Software folder
and selecting EPSON Software Updater.
398
• macOS 10.12.x, 10.13.x, 10.14.x, 10.15.x, 11.x, 12.x, 13.x: You can manually update the software by
opening the App Store, selecting Updates, searching for a software update option for Epson
Software, and selecting Update.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Status Messages
You can often diagnose problems with your product by checking the messages on the LCD screen.
LCD screen message Condition/solution
Change paper settings
Paper setting in the printer driver
is different from paper
information registered in the
printer. Change paper setting
from the application or the driver.
For details, see your
documentation.
To change paper information that was registered using Epson Media
Installer, load the paper and then use the control panel.
You can also use Epson Media Installer to change paper information
for paper that has not been loaded.
Depending on the version of Epson Media Installer you are using,
you may not be able to change the paper information.
Check the media settings on the driver to determine which media is
being used. To change the media, select Paper Setting > paper
source > Change Paper type > Paper Type, and select the media
that matches the driver setting.
You can also select Use Printer Settings when you select the
media, which will default to the paper that is set on the LCD screen.
TCP/IP configuration failed
The combination of the IP
address and the subnet mask is
invalid. See your documentation
for more details.
Enter the correct values for the IP address and the default gateway.
Check with your network administrator if you do not know the correct
values.
A printer part needs to be
replaced
Contact Epson Support. For
details, see your documentation.
XXXXXXXX
(maintenance request code)
A part used in the printer is nearing the end of its service life. Contact
Epson for support and provide them with the displayed maintenance
request code. The error persists until you replace the requested part.
If you continue to use the printer, a printer error will occur.
399
LCD screen message Condition/solution
Printer error. Turn power off and
on again. If the problem persists,
contact Epson support.
XXXXXXXX
(service code)
An error message occurs when:
• The power cable is not connected securely
• An error occurs that cannot be cleared
When a printer error has occurred, the printer automatically stops
printing. Turn off the printer, disconnect the power cable from the
outlet and the printer, and reconnect them. Turn the printer on and
off several times. If the same error message is displayed on the LCD
screen, contact Epson for support and provide them with the
displayed service code.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Related references
Where to Get Help (Latin America)
Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)
Related tasks
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Replacing the Maintenance Box
Replacing the Borderless Maintenance Boxes
Resetting Control Panel Defaults
If you have a problem with settings on the product control panel, you can reset them to their factory
defaults. You can choose which settings to reset or reset them all.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Select > General Settings > System Administration > Restore Default Settings
2. Select one of these options:
• Network Settings: Resets all network settings.
• Clear All Data and Settings: Resets all control panel settings except date and time, length unit,
and language settings.
You see a confirmation screen.
400
3. Select Yes to reset the selected settings. (Select No if you want to cancel the operation.)
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Solving Printer Problems
Check these sections if you have problems operating your product.
Product Does Not Turn On or Turns Off Unexpectedly
LCD Screen Shuts Off
Media Does Not Cut Cleanly
Red Light Shines Inside the Printer
Product Stops Printing Unexpectedly
Forgot the Administrator Password
Software Installation Problems
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Does Not Turn On or Turns Off Unexpectedly
If the product does not turn on or turns off unexpectedly, try these solutions:
• Make sure the power cable is securely connected.
• Make sure the power outlet works by connecting the power cable for another electronic device.
• Turn off or adjust the Power Off Timer setting as necessary.
Parent topic: Solving Printer Problems
LCD Screen Shuts Off
If the LCD screen shuts off intermittently, the printer may be in sleep mode. Try these solutions:
• Press the touchscreen or any of the buttons on the control panel to exit sleep mode.
• You can adjust the delay time before the product enters sleep mode in the Basic Settings menu.
Parent topic: Solving Printer Problems
Related references
Basic Settings Menu
Media Does Not Cut Cleanly
If the built-in cutter does not cleanly cut your media, replace the cutter.
401
Parent topic: Solving Printer Problems
Red Light Shines Inside the Printer
The red light always shines inside the printer. This is normal.
Parent topic: Solving Printer Problems
Product Stops Printing Unexpectedly
If your product stops printing unexpectedly, try these solutions:
• Make sure the power cable is securely connected.
• Check the messages on the control panel. If an error has occurred, follow the instructions on the
screen to clear the error.
• If an error occurs during printing, the print queue enters Pause status and stops printing. Do one of the
following to check the status of the print queue:
• In Windows, double-click the printer icon in the Devices and Printers, Printers, or Printers and
Faxes folder; if printing is paused, open the Printer menu and clear the Pause check box.
• On a Mac, select System Preferences > Printers & Scanners or Print & Fax > Open Print
Queue. Double-click the icon for any printer that is Paused and click Resume Printer.
• If an error occurs during printing with the Adobe Embedded Print Engine, check the following:
Note: The Adobe Embedded Print Engine is not available on SureColor
P6570DE/P6570E/T3770DE/T3770E.
• Make sure the paper width does not exceed the width of the printer. Try enabling the Auto Rotate
function or change the input data or the print settings so that the print width fits the width of the
printer.
• Make sure the selected paper type is supported.
• The print data may be corrupted. Check the data and correct it, if necessary.
• If the print data is too complicated to process when printing a PDF file, try lowering the PDF
rendering level in Printer Settings > PS Settings.
• Make sure the file size is 2 GB or less.
• Print a PS Error sheet (Printer Settings > PS Settings) and check the messages on the report to
help determine the cause of the problem.
Parent topic: Solving Printer Problems
402
Forgot the Administrator Password
The preset value for the administrator password is the product serial number. Check the label on the
back of the product to locate the serial number. We recommend that you change the preset password as
soon as possible to prevent unauthorized access.
If you forgot the administrator password you created during network setup, contact Epson for support.
Parent topic: Solving Printer Problems
Software Installation Problems
If you have problems while installing your product software, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and any necessary cables are securely connected at both ends.
Also make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system. If you still have
problems installing software, contact your system administrator.
• Close any other programs, including screen savers and virus protection software, and install your
product software again.
• In Windows, make sure your product is selected as the default printer and the correct port is shown in
the printer properties.
• For Mac, make sure your product is shown in the printer list. Click System Preferences or System
Settings > Printers & Scanners or Print & Fax. If the printer name is not displayed, add the printer.
• If you see any error message or your software does not install correctly in Windows, you may not have
software installation privileges. Contact your system administrator.
• If you are printing over a network, make sure your product is set up properly on the network.
• If the USB cable is not recognized, try using a different USB cable.
Parent topic: Solving Printer Problems
Solving Network Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems setting up or using your product on a network.
Note: Breakdown or repair of this product may cause loss of network data and settings. Epson is not
responsible for backing up or recovering data and settings during or after the warranty period. We
recommend that you make your own backup or print out your network data and settings.
Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point
Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network
403
Product Does Not Appear in Mac Printer Window
Wired Network Connection Becomes Unstable
Cannot Print Over a Network
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point
If your product has trouble finding or connecting to a wireless router or access point, try these solutions:
• If you are connecting the product via Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) and the Wi-Fi icon on your
product's LCD screen is not lit or does not appear, make sure you select one of the WPS options from
the product control panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router.
• Make sure to place your product within contact range of your router or access point. Avoid placing
your product near a microwave oven, cordless phone, or large metal object, such as a filing cabinet.
• Verify that your router or access point is operating correctly by connecting to it from your computer or
another device.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5
GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band,
give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home
Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for
instructions.
• Print a network connection report and check the codes and messages on the report to help determine
the cause of the problem.
• You may need to disable the firewall and any anti-virus software on your wireless router or access
point.
• Try restarting your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
Note: If you are reading these instructions online, you will lose your Internet connection when you
restart your router.
• Check to see if access restrictions, such as MAC address filtering, are set on the router or access
point. If access restrictions are set, add your product's MAC address to your router's address list. To
obtain your product's MAC address, print a network status sheet. Then follow the instructions in your
router or access point documentation to add the address to the list.
• If your router or access point does not broadcast its network name (SSID), follow the instructions that
came with your product to enter your wireless network name manually.
404
• If your router or access point has security enabled, determine the kind of security it is using and any
required password or passphrase for connection. Then make sure to enter the exact WEP key or WPA
passphrase correctly.
• Check if your computer is restricting the available wireless channels. If so, verify that your wireless
access point is using one of the usable channels and change to a usable channel, if necessary.
• If you cannot connect your product to a device using Wi-Fi Direct, you may have exceeded the
maximum number of devices connected to your product (4). Print a network status sheet or access
Web Config on the browser for your device and check the number of connected devices. If 4 devices
are already connected, disconnect a device by deleting the product's SSID from the Wi-Fi screen of
that device. If fewer than 4 devices are connected, check the accuracy of your other network settings,
move your device closer to your product, and try connecting again.
• If you are using a Wi-Fi Direct connection that suddenly disconnects, the Wi-Fi Direct password on
your device may have been changed. If necessary, delete the existing DIRECT-xxxxxxxx connection
settings from your device and enter a new password. See your device documentation for instructions.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network
If EpsonNet Setup cannot find your product on a network, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and connected to your network. Verify the connection using your
product control panel.
• Check if your network name (SSID) contains non-ASCII characters. Your product cannot display non-
ASCII characters.
• Print a network connection report and check the codes and messages on the report to help determine
the cause of the problem.
• Make sure your product is not connected to a guest network.
• If necessary, reinstall your product software and try running EpsonNet Setup again:
1. Reset your product's network settings to their factory defaults.
2. Windows only: Uninstall your product software.
3. Restart your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
Note: If you are reading these instructions online, you will lose your Internet connection when you
restart your router, so note the next step before restarting it.
405
4. Download your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the Start Here
sheet.
• If you have replaced your router, reinstall your product software to connect to the new router.
• Check to see if your wireless router or access point has an enabled Privacy Separator function that is
preventing detection of your device over the network. See your router or access point documentation
for instructions on disabling the Privacy Separator function.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5
GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
band,give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and
Home Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for
instructions.
• Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer. Check the network
connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for details.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related concepts
Uninstall Your Product Software
Related tasks
Resetting Control Panel Defaults
Product Does Not Appear in Mac Printer Window
If your product does not appear in the Mac printer window, try these solutions:
• Turn your product off, wait 30 seconds, then turn it back on again.
• If you are connecting the product via Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) and the Wi-Fi icon on your
product's LCD screen is not lit, make sure you select one of the WPS options from the product control
panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router.
• If you are connecting the product wirelessly via EpsonNet Setup and the Wi-Fi icon on your product's
LCD screen is not lit, make sure your product software was installed correctly. If necessary, reinstall
your software.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5
GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
band,give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and
Home Network 5 GHz.
406
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Wired Network Connection Becomes Unstable
When you connect the product to a wired network using a router or access point that supports IEEE
802.3az (Energy Efficient Ethernet), the connection may become unstable, you may be unable to
connect to the product, and the communication speed may become slow. If you experience any of these
issues, follow the steps below to disable IEEE 802.3az and then connect your product again.
1. Disconnect the Ethernet cables connected to the computer and your product.
2. Disable IEEE 802.3az for the computer's network adapter if it is enabled (check your operating
system's Ethernet connection settings).
3. Connect the computer and your product directly with an Ethernet cable.
4. Print a network connection report from your product.
5. Check the printer's IP address on the network connection report.
6. On the computer, open a web browser and enter your product's IP address from the network
connection report.
7. Select Network Settings > Ethernet.
8. Select OFF for IEEE 802.3az. and click Next.
9. Click OK and remove the Ethernet cable connecting the computer and your product.
10. If you disabled IEEE 802.3az for your computer's network adapter, enable it.
11. Reconnect the Ethernet cables from the router or access point to your computer and product.
If problems still occur, other devices on the network may be causing them.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Cannot Print Over a Network
If you cannot print over a network, try these solutions:
• Make sure that your product is turned on.
• Make sure you install your product's network software as described in your product documentation.
• Print a network status sheet and verify that the network settings are correct. If the network status is
Disconnected, check any cable connections and turn your product off and then on again.
• Print a network connection report and check the codes and messages on the report to help determine
the cause of the problem.
407
• If you are using TCP/IP, make sure the product's IP address is set correctly for your network. If your
network does not assign IP addresses using DHCP, set the IP address manually.
• Make sure that the latest version of your product's Epson printer driver is installed. If a genuine Epson
printer driver is not installed, the available functions are limited.
• If network printing is slow, print a network status sheet and check the signal strength. If it is poor, place
your product closer to your router or access point. Avoid placing your product near a microwave oven,
cordless phone, or large metal object, such as a filing cabinet.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and
5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band,
give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home
Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for
instructions.
• Try restarting your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
Note: If you are reading these instructions online, you will lose your Internet connection when you
restart your router.
• Check to see if your wireless router or access point has an enabled Privacy Separator function that is
preventing printing from a device over the network. See your router or access point documentation for
instructions on disabling the Privacy Separator function.
• Check your wired LAN router or access point to see if the LED for the port to which your product is
connected is on or flashing. If the link LED is off, try the following:
• Make sure the Ethernet cable is securely connected to your product and to your router, access
point, switch, or hub.
• Try connecting your product to a different port or a different router, access point, switch, or hub.
• Try connecting with a different Ethernet cable.
• Try printing to your product from another computer on the network.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related tasks
Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel
Printing a Network Status Sheet
Printing a Network Connection Report
408
Solving Printing Problems
Check these sections if you have problems printing with your product.
Nothing Prints
Print Head Moves But Nothing Prints
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Nothing Prints
If you have sent a print job and nothing prints, try these solutions:
• Make sure your printer is turned on.
• Make sure there are no error messages on the product's LCD screen.
• Make sure any interface cables are connected securely at both ends. If you have a spare cable, try
connecting with the spare cable.
• Check the model and specifications of the interface cable to see if the cable is appropriate for your
computer and printer.
• If you connected your printer to a USB hub, make sure it is a first-tier hub. If it still does not print,
connect your printer directly to your computer instead of the hub.
• Make sure the USB hub is recognized correctly on the computer. Disconnect all USB hubs from the
computer and connect the printer directly to the computer's USB port.
• If you have an optional print server connected to the printer, make sure you are not saving the print job
to the hard drive.
• Make sure the USB cable length does not exceed 10 feet (3 m).
Parent topic: Solving Printing Problems
Related references
Interface Specifications
Print Head Moves But Nothing Prints
If the print head is moving and nothing prints, try these solutions:
• Print a nozzle check pattern. If the pattern does not print correctly, clean the print head again. (If the
printer has not been used for a long time the nozzles may be clogged.)
• If you see the message Motor Self Adjustment Running on the product's LCD screen, the printer is
adjusting its internal motor. Wait a few moments for the message to disappear and do not turn off the
printer.
409
Parent topic: Solving Printing Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Nozzle Check
Print Head Cleaning
Solving Paper Problems
Check these sections if you have problems using paper with your product.
Paper Feeding Problems
Roll Paper Jam Problems
Cut Sheet Paper Jam Problems
Paper Does Not Collect in the Basket or is Creased
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Paper Feeding Problems
If you have problems feeding paper, try these solutions:
• Make sure paper is loaded in the correct orientation. Load cut sheets vertically (short edge first).
• For best results, follow these guidelines:
• Use new, smooth, high-quality paper that is not damp, curled, creased, old, too thin, or too thick.
• Follow any special loading instructions that came with the paper.
• If roll paper does not feed, cut the end straight across and uncurl it by rolling it backward, if necessary.
Then reload the paper.
• If you cannot insert paper easily into the paper feed slot, make sure the paper is perfectly flat and not
curled.
• Do not load more than one piece of cut sheet paper.
• Make sure your paper meets the specifications for your product.
410
• If poster board does not feed, make sure you are loading it straight into the product, not at an angle.
Guide the poster board as shown to keep it horizontal.
• If paper feeds at an angle, make sure Detect Paper Skew is set to On in the Printer Settings menu.
• If paper does not eject correctly, decrease the Paper Suction setting for the loaded paper type.
• Make sure that paper is not jammed inside the product.
• Make sure you are using the product at the proper room temperature.
• If roll marks appear on the paper during automatic feeding, select General Settings > Printer
Settings > Paper Source Settings > Roll Paper Setup on the product control panel and turn Auto
Loading > Off. If roll marks still remain, feed the paper manually until you hear the printer beep twice,
then manually switch out the roll.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Paper Setting Menu
Paper Specifications
411
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Related topics
Roll Paper Handling
Cut Sheet Handling
Roll Paper Jam Problems
If roll paper has jammed in the printer, follow the steps here to clear the jam.
Note: The illustrations shown may differ from your model, but the instructions are the same unless
otherwise noted.
1. Cut the paper at the area shown for each roll.
Roll 1/Roll
412
Roll 2 (not available on SureColor P6570E/T3770E)
2. Open the printer covers.
413
3. Carefully slide the print head away from the paper jam as shown.
Caution: Do not touch the print head unless you are removing a paper jam. Touching the print head
or the surrounding cables may cause a static shock and damage the printer.
4. Remove the jammed paper.
414
Caution: Do not touch the rollers, ink absorbing areas, or ink tubes shown here or you may damage
the printer.
5. Close the printer covers.
415
6. If there is any paper left inside the printer, open the rear cover and remove the paper.
7. Turn the printer off and back on again.
8. Cut the edge of the roll paper straight horizontally, then reload the roll paper.
Note: Make sure to cut off any jagged or folded sections of paper.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related tasks
Cutting Roll Paper Manually
Related topics
Roll Paper Handling
Cut Sheet Paper Jam Problems
If cut sheet paper has jammed in the printer, follow the steps here to clear the jam.
416
Note: The illustrations shown may differ from your model, but the instructions are the same unless
otherwise noted.
1. Open the printer covers.
2. Carefully slide the print head away from the paper jam as shown.
417
Caution: Do not touch the print head unless you are removing a paper jam. Touching the print head
or the surrounding cables may cause a static shock and damage the printer.
3. Remove the jammed paper.
Caution: Do not touch the rollers, ink absorbing areas, or ink tubes shown here or you may damage
the printer.
418
4. Close the printer covers.
5. Turn the printer off and back on again.
6. Reload the paper, making sure it is not skewed.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related topics
Cut Sheet Handling
Paper Does Not Collect in the Basket or is Creased
If paper does not collect correctly in the paper basket, try these solutions:
• If paper does not collect in the basket, gently press on the paper basket as paper is ejected from the
printer. This prevents the paper from catching on the basket.
• If the paper folds after cutting, set the Auto Cut setting to Off. Cut the paper manually while
supporting the print.
• If the paper creases and does not collect in the basket, close the basket and resume printing. Before
the paper reaches floor, hold the paper with both hands and continue to support it until printing is
complete. Do not load more than one piece of cut sheet paper at a time.
• Make sure you are printing at normal room temperatures (59 to 77° F [15 to 25° C]) and humidity.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
419
Solving Print Quality Problems
Check these sections if you have problems with print quality.
Nozzle Check Pattern Prints Incorrectly
Overall Print Quality is Poor
Lines Are Misaligned
Prints are Scuffed or Smeared
Prints are Wrinkled
Margins Appear in Borderless Prints
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Nozzle Check Pattern Prints Incorrectly
If the nozzle check pattern does not print correctly, try these solutions:
• Clean the print head and print the check pattern again. If cleaning the print head several times does
not solve the problem, use a stronger print head cleaning level.
• If nozzles are still clogged after head cleaning at the strongest level, leave the product turned off
overnight and check the nozzles again. If you still cannot clear the nozzles, contact Epson support.
• If the printer has not been used for a long time, nozzles may be dried and clogged. Turn the printer on
at least once every few weeks and print a nozzle check pattern to prevent the nozzles from clogging.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Nozzle Check
Print Head Cleaning
Ruled Line Alignment
Related tasks
Running a Power Cleaning Using the Product Control Panel
Overall Print Quality is Poor
If you notice that your print quality is uneven, too light, too dark, or there are lines in the print (banding),
try these solutions:
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• Align the print head.
420
• Make sure you are using genuine Epson ink cartridges. If you use non-Epson ink cartridges, printouts
may be faint, or the color of the printed image may be uneven because the remaining ink level is not
correctly detected.
• Make sure your ink cartridges have not expired. For best results, use ink cartridges before the
expiration date printed on the package (within one year of installation in the printer). Replace expired
cartridges with new ones.
• Shake the cartridges before installing them in the printer. To maintain optimum print quality, remove
and shake the installed cartridges every six months or if the printer has not been used in the last three
months.
• Make sure you selected the correct Media Type setting in the printer driver that matches the paper
loaded in the printer.
• Compare the print result with the image on your computer screen. Since monitors and printers
produce colors differently, printed colors and screen colors do not always look the same.
• Make sure that the printer cover is closed during printing.
• Check the ink levels on the LCD screen. Replace any cartridges that are low on ink.
• Enable color management in the software application or in the printer driver.
• If you are using non-Epson media, make sure you create a custom paper configuration for the media.
• Check the quality setting that you selected in the printer driver. Using a faster printing method may
decrease the overall print quality.
• If colors are uneven near the leading edge of the print, add a larger margin. In the print driver, you can
also set Quality Options > Paper Edge Quality to Add Top Margin or Optimize Media Edge Print
Quality.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Nozzle Check
Ruled Line Alignment
Related tasks
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Creating Custom Paper Settings
421
Lines Are Misaligned
With bidirectional printing, the print head prints while moving left and right. If the print head is misaligned,
ruled lines may be misaligned as a result. If you see vertical lines in the (bidirectional) print output, align
the print head.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related concepts
Ruled Line Alignment
Prints are Scuffed or Smeared
If your prints are scuffed or smeared, try these solutions:
• Make sure your paper meets the specifications for your product.
• Do not use paper with folds or creases and always use new media.
• If you are using cut sheet paper, check that changes in humidity and temperature have not made the
paper wavy or curled up on the edges. Flatten the paper before loading it or use new paper.
• If the surface of the paper is scuffed, select a wider Platen Gap setting. If results do not improve, set
Custom Paper Setting > Paper Eject Roller to Use.
Caution: The Paper Eject Roller setting may damage glossy paper.
• If ink is smeared on your prints, clean the rollers. Load blank paper and select > Forward to feed it
through the printer.
• If you are using non-Epson media, make sure you create a custom paper configuration for the media.
• Make sure the Paper Size Check setting is set to On, or the printer may print outside the edges of the
loaded paper and smear ink on the back of the print.
• Depending on the print density and type of paper you are using, the ink may take a while to dry. Do not
stack the prints until the ink is completely dry.
• Make sure that the printer driver's Media Type settings match the paper that you are using.
• If the bottom edge is scuffed, try widening the bottom margin. Set Top Margin to 45 mm and Bottom
Margin to 15 mm.
• If the trailing edge is scuffed while printing, create your data with a wider margin. If the situation does
not improve, select Optimize Edge Quality from the printer driver.
• If you are printing multiple pages and Auto Cut is set to Never Cut, the area between pages may be
scuffed. Set Margin Between Pages to 65mm from Custom Paper Setting.
422
• Try cleaning the area around the print head, caps, and wipers.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related references
Paper Specifications
Related tasks
Cleaning the Roll Paper Feeder
Creating Custom Paper Settings
Related topics
Cutting Roll Paper
Prints are Wrinkled
If you see wrinkles on your prints, try the following to solve the problem:
• Dry the paper after printing.
• Roll out the paper and stretch it.
• Lower the color density in the Paper Configuration dialog in the printer driver.
• Lower the resolution in the Print Quality setting in the printer driver.
• Make sure you are operating the printer at normal room temperature. The normal operating range for
Epson special media is 59 to 77 °F (15 to 25˚C), 40 to 60% humidity. For information about other
paper types, see the documentation supplied with the paper.
• Make sure you selected the correct Media Type setting in the printer driver that matches the paper
loaded in the printer.
• If you are using non-Epson media, make sure you create a custom paper configuration for the media.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Margins Appear in Borderless Prints
If borderless prints still have margins, try these solutions:
• Check the print settings selected in your print application you are using, as well as the printer driver.
• Make sure that the paper settings on the LCD screen match the paper you loaded.
• Make sure borderless enlargement is not set to Min in the printer driver.
• Paper that is stored incorrectly may expand or contract. Make sure you have stored the paper
according to the manufacturer's specifications.
423
• Check that the paper you are using supports borderless printing.
• If you are using roll paper, change the Adjust Cut Position setting. This may reduce the margins at
the top and bottom of the print.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related references
Borderless Paper Type Compatibility
Paper Specifications
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Related topics
Roll Paper Handling
Cut Sheet Handling
Solving Scanning Problems (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Check these sections if you have problems scanning with the integrated scanner in your product.
Cannot Feed Originals Correctly
Removing a Jammed Original (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Scanned Image is Misaligned
Lines Appear on Scanned or Copied Documents
Scanned Image Size Does Not Match Print Size
Scanner Slot Has Detached
Parent topic: Solving Problems
424
Cannot Feed Originals Correctly
If you cannot feed originals into the scanner successfully, try these solutions:
• Make sure the scanner edge guide is placed correctly. The right edge of the original should be lined up
straight.
Note: Remove the scanner edge guide if you are using the carrier sheet.
• Make sure the loaded original is not skewed. Reload the original if it is skewed.
• If the original is folded, unfold it. Folded originals may cause the Auto Detect setting to misread the
size of the original.
• Clean inside the scanner.
• Make sure the document type can be loaded.
Parent topic: Solving Scanning Problems (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
425
Removing a Jammed Original (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
To remove a jammed original from the integrated scanner, follow the steps below.
1. Open the scanner cover.
Caution: When opening and closing the scanner cover, keep your hands away from the gap between
the scanner cover and the printer. Otherwise, your fingers or hands may be injured.
427
Scanned Image is Misaligned
If the scanned image is not aligned correctly, try these solutions:
• Change the direction of the original.
• If the original is curled, try to correct the curl before loading the original.
• Perform Image Stitching Adjustment.
• Use the optional carrier sheet.
Adjusting Scanned Image Stitching
Parent topic: Solving Scanning Problems (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Adjusting Scanned Image Stitching
If your scanned images are not aligned correctly, you can adjust the way the image is stitched together.
In the image below, the scanned image is misaligned in the center. The arrow shows the feed direction
of the original.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select > General Settings > Scan Settings > Scan Options > Image Stitching Adjustment.
428
You see a screen like this:
3. Tap the adjustment value area to adjust the value directly, or use the +/- buttons to change the
value.
Shifting the value of the adjustment by 1 will correct the misalignment by approximately 0.1 mm.
Increase the value to correct alignment like this:
Decrease the value to correct alignment like this:
4. Select OK to finish entering the value.
430
Caution: Never use volatile chemicals such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol. Doing so could damage the
scanner.
1. Open the scanner cover.
Caution: When opening and closing the scanner cover, keep your hands away from the gap between
the scanner cover and the printer. Otherwise, your fingers or hands may be injured.
431
2. Use a soft, lint-free cloth to carefully wipe the inside of the scanner.
Caution: Use only a dry, soft cloth. Do not use liquid or chemical cleansers. Do not use brushes or
other hard objects to clean inside the scanner; they may scratch the glass surface and affect the print
quality.
Parent topic: Solving Scanning Problems (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Scanned Image Size Does Not Match Print Size
If your roll paper printouts need to match the length of your scanned or copied files exactly, you can
adjust the document feed.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select > General Settings > Scan Settings > Scan Options > Document Feed Adjustment.
3. Tap the adjustment value area to adjust the value directly, or use the +/- buttons to change the
value.
The adjustment value is calculated using the following formula:
[Length of Original]/[Length of Print Result]×100-100 with the result rounded at the second
decimal.
For example, if the length of the original is 50 cm, and the print result is 50.1 cm, the formula would
look like:
50 / 50.1 × 100 - 100 = -0.1996 rounded to -0.2
432
You would enter -0.2 as the adjustment value.
4. Select OK to enter the value.
Parent topic: Solving Scanning Problems (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Scanner Slot Has Detached
If the scanner slot has detached from the printer, open the scanner cover and reinstall the scanner slot.
Insert the scanner slot from the left side, as shown.
Parent topic: Solving Scanning Problems (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Uninstall Your Product Software
If you have a problem that requires you to uninstall and re-install your software, follow the instructions for
your operating system.
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows
Uninstalling Product Software - Mac
433
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows
You can uninstall and then re-install your printer software to solve certain problems.
1. Turn off the product.
2. Disconnect any interface cables.
3. Close all applications running on your computer.
4. Do one of the following:
• Windows 10: Right-click and select Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features.
Select the uninstall option for your Epson product, then select Uninstall/Change.
Note: If you see a User Account Control window, click Yes or Continue.
Select your product again, if necessary, then select OK, and click Yes to confirm the
uninstallation.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Programs > Programs
and Features. Select the uninstall option for your Epson product, then select Uninstall/Change.
Note: If you see a User Account Control window, click Yes or Continue.
Select your product again, if necessary, then select OK, and click Yes to confirm the
uninstallation.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson, select your product, then click EPSON Printer Software Uninstall.
Note: If you see a User Account Control window, click Yes or Continue.
In the next window, select your product and click OK. Then follow any on-screen instructions.
5. Restart your computer, then re-install your software.
Note: If re-installing your product software does not solve a problem, contact Epson support.
Parent topic: Uninstall Your Product Software
434
Uninstalling Product Software - Mac
In most cases, you do not need to uninstall your product software before re-installing it. However, you
can download the Uninstaller utility from the Epson support website to uninstall your product software as
described here.
Note: If re-installing your product software does not solve a problem, contact Epson support.
1. To download the Uninstaller utility, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or
latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
2. Click Downloads.
3. Select your operating system, click Utilities, locate the Uninstaller utility, and click Download. (If
you do not see an Uninstaller utility, search for "Uninstaller" using the site search field.)
4. Run the file you downloaded.
5. Double-click the Uninstaller icon.
6. In the Epson Uninstaller screen, select the checkbox for each software program you want to
uninstall.
7. Click Uninstall.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the software.
9. Reinstall your product software.
Note: If you uninstall the printer driver and your product name remains in the Print & Fax, Print & Scan,
or Printers & Scanners window, select your product name and click the – (remove) icon to remove it.
Parent topic: Uninstall Your Product Software
Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)
Epson provides technical support and information on the installation, configuration, and operation of
professional printing products through the Epson Preferred Limited Warranty Plan. Dial (888) 377-6611,
7 a.m. to 4 p.m., Pacific Time, Monday through Friday. Days and hours of support are subject to change
without notice.
Note: If you experience difficulty with the toll-free number, call (562) 276-1305 (U.S.).
Before you call, make sure you have your printer serial number and proof of purchase.
435
Visit epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada) and select your product for solutions to
common problems. You can download drivers, firmware, and documentation, get FAQs and
troubleshooting advice, or e-mail Epson with your questions.
Note: For help using any other software on your system, see the documentation for that software for
technical support information.
Purchase Supplies and Accessories
You can purchase genuine Epson ink, paper, and accessories from an Epson authorized reseller. To
find the nearest reseller, visit proimaging.epson.com (U.S.) or proimaging.epson.ca (Canada), select
your product series and product, and click the Where to Buy button. Or call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-
7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Where to Get Help (Latin America)
If you need additional help with your Epson product, contact Epson.
Epson provides these technical support services:
Internet Support
Visit Epson's support website at latin.epson.com/support and select your product for solutions to
common problems. You can download drivers, firmware, and documentation, get FAQs and
troubleshooting advice, or e-mail Epson with your questions.
Note: For help using any other software on your system, see the documentation for that software for
technical support information.
Speak to a Support Representative
Before you call Epson for support, please have the following information ready:
• Product name
• Product serial number (located on a label on the product)
• Proof of purchase (such as a store receipt) and date of purchase
• Computer configuration
• Description of the problem
Then call:
436
Country Telephone
Argentina (54 11) 5167-0300
0800-288-37766
Bolivia* 800-100-116
Brazil For the support phone number for your product,
visit Epson's support website at
epson.com.br/suporte, select your product, and
click the Contact Us tab.
Chile (56 2) 2484-3400
Colombia Bogota: (57 1) 602-4751
Other cities: 01-8000-915235
Costa Rica 800-377-6627
Ecuador* 1-800-000-044
El Salvador* 800-6570
Guatemala* 1-800-835-0358
Mexico Mexico City: (52 55) 1323-2052
Other cities: 01-800-087-1080
Nicaragua* 00-1-800-226-0368
Panama* 00-800-052-1376
Paraguay 009-800-521-0019
Peru Lima: (51 1) 418-0210
Other cities: 0800-10-126
Uruguay 00040-5210067
Venezuela (58 212) 240-1111
* Contact your local phone company to call this toll-free number from a mobile phone.
If your country does not appear in the list, contact the sales office in the nearest country. Toll or long
distance charges may apply.
438
Technical Specifications
These sections list the technical specifications for your product.
Note: Epson offers a recycling program for end of life Epson products. Please go to this site (U.S.) or
this site (Canada) for information on how to return your Epson products for proper disposal.
Windows System Requirements
Mac System Requirements
Printing Specifications
Paper Specifications
Printable Area Specifications
Ink Specifications
Dimension Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Interface Specifications
Network Interface Specifications
Scanning Specifications (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Safety and Approvals Specifications
Windows System Requirements
To use your product and its software, your computer should meet these requirements.
Microsoft Windows OS
version
(32- and 64-bit
compatible)
Windows 11, Windows 10, Windows 8.x, Windows 7, Windows Server 2022,
Windows Server 2019, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2012 R2,
Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008,
Windows Server 2003 R2, Windows Server 2003 SP2 or later
CPU Intel Core 2 Duo 3.05 GHz or more
Memory 1GB or more
Hard disk space
available
32GB or more
Display resolution WXGA (1280 × 800) or higher
439
Connection method USB, Ethernet, or Wi-Fi
Note: For the latest product software available for your operating system, visit the Epson support site at
epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America),
select your product, and select Downloads.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Mac System Requirements
To use your product and its software, your Mac should meet these requirements.
OS X version 10.9.5 or later
CPU Intel Core2 Duo 2 GHz or more
Memory 2 GB or more
Hard disk space
available
8 GB or more
Display resolution WXGA+ (1280 × 800) or higher
Connection method USB, Ethernet, or Wi-Fi
Note: For the latest product software available for your operating system, visit the Epson support site at
epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America),
select your product, and select Downloads.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Printing Specifications
Printing method On-demand inkjet
Printhead PrecisionCore MicroTFP
Nozzle configuration 9600 nozzles (1600 nozzles × 6 colors)
Ink droplet volume 3.5 pl minimum
Resolution 2400 × 1200 dpi maximum
Built-in memory 4 GB
440
Printer language SureColor P6570DE/P6570E/T3770DE/T3770E: ESC/P raster
(undisclosed command), HP-GL/2, HP RTL
SureColor P6570D/P8570D/P8570DL/T3770D/
T5770D/T5770DM/T7770D/T7770DL/T7770DM: ESC/P raster
(undisclosed command), HP-GL/2, HP RTL, Adobe PostScript 3,
Adobe PDF 1.7
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Paper Specifications
Note: Since the quality of any particular brand or type of paper may be changed by the manufacturer at
any time, Epson cannot guarantee the quality of any non-Epson brand or type of paper. Always test a
sample of paper stock before purchasing large quantities or printing large jobs.
Roll paper
Supported paper sizes vary by model.
Paper feed method Friction feed
Core size 2 inches (51 mm) and 3 inches (76 mm)
Outer diameter Up to 6.69 inches (170 mm)
Width Varies by model (see the link below)
Thickness Plain paper: 0.003 to 0.03 inches (0.07 to 0.8 mm)
Weight Up to 27.55 lbs (12.5 kg)
Cut sheet/poster board (manual feed)
Supported paper sizes vary by model.
Thickness 0.003 to 0.03 inches (0.07 to 0.8 mm)
Poster board: 0.031 to 0.059 inch (0.8 to 1.5 mm)
Length 8.66 to 63 inches (220 to 1600 mm)
Width Varies by model (see the link below)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
441
Related references
Supported Paper Widths
Printable Area Specifications
In the illustrations below, the gray area represents the printable area; the white arrow indicates the
direction in which the paper is ejected. If the margin set in an application is larger than the following
setting values, sections beyond the specified margins are not printed. For example, if 15 mm is selected
for the left and right margins in the printer menus and the document fills the page, the 15 mm at the left
and right sides of the page will not be printed.
Note: When printing borderless, quality may decline in the expanded printable area.
Roll paper
Note: Margins may change depending on the Top Margin setting that you select. If you select Save
Roll Paper as the Roll Paper Option on the printer driver's Advanced tab, the top and bottom margins of
the paper are set to 0 mm. The margins listed below are the standard settings. When printing with the left
and right borderless setting, the left and right margins are set to 0 mm. When printing with the borderless
on all sides setting, all margins are set to 0 mm.
1 Printable width: Varies by model (see the link below)
2 Left/right margin: 0.12 to 0.59 inches (3 to 15 mm)
442
3 Top margin: 0.12 to 0.59 inches (3 to 15 mm)*
4 Printable length: up to 298 feet (91 m)**
Note: Actual maximum print length depends on print application, paper size, printer driver
settings, and operating system.
5 Bottom margin: 0.12 to 1.77 inches (3 to 45 mm)*
* For these paper types the default top and bottom margins are 0.8 inch (20 mm): Epson Premium
Glossy Photo Paper (250), Epson Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250), Epson Premium Luster Photo
Paper (260), and Epson Premium Semimatte Photo Paper (250). When printing on Epson Singleweight
Matte Paper in CAD/Line Drawing mode, the default top and bottom margins are 0.12 inches/0.59
inches (3 mm/15 mm).
** The maximum printable length using the Epson driver on Windows is 298 feet (91 m). To print longer
images, you need to use third-party banner printing software and select Roll Paper (Banner) as the
Source setting in the printer driver.
Note: Actual maximum print length depends on print application, paper size, printer driver settings, and
operating system. Even if the margins change, the printed size does not change.
Note: Printing is distorted when the trailing edge of the roll paper comes off the core. Make sure the
trailing edge does not come inside the printing area.
Cut sheets
443
Note: When printing borderless, the left and right margins are set to 0. (Borderless printing is not
available with poster board.)
1 Printable width: Varies by model (see the link below)
2 Left/right/bottom margin: 0.12 inches (3 mm)
3 Top margin: 0.5 inches (12.7 mm)
4 Printable length: 8.66 to 62.99 inches (220 to 1600 mm)
Note: The smallest size supported by the printer is 10 inches (254 mm) wide by 5 inches (127 mm) long.
If you create a custom paper size that is smaller than 10 × 5 inches (254 × 127 mm), the document will
print with wider-than-expected margins, which must be trimmed.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Related references
Supported Paper Widths
Ink Specifications
Note: This product is designed to work with genuine Epson inks. Non-Epson ink or any other ink not
specified for this printer could cause damage not covered by Epson's warranties.
Type Dedicated ink cartridges
SureColor P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E/P8570D: UltraChrome PRO
6 ink
SureColor
T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E/T5770D/T5770DM/T7770D/T7770DM:
UltraChrome XD3 ink
Dedicated ink supply units (ink packs)
SureColor P8570DL: UltraChrome PRO 6 ink
SureColor T7770DL: UltraChrome XD3 ink
444
Water-based pigment ink SureColor P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E/P8570D/P8570DL: Photo
Black, Matte Black, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Gray
SureColor
T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E/T5770D/T5770DM/T7770D/T7770DL/T7
770DM: Photo Black, Matte Black, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Red
Use by date See the expiration date printed on the package
Print quality guarantee After installation: 1 year (when stored at normal temperatures)
Temperature Transporting: –4 to 140 °F (–20 to 60 °C)
• 72 hours at 140 °F (60 °C)
• 4 days at –4 °F (–20 °C)
• 1 month at 104 °F (40 °C)
Uninstalled: –4 to 104 °F (–20 to 40 °C)
• 4 days at –4 °F (–20 °C)
• 1 month at 104 °F (40 °C)
Installed (ink cartridges): 14 to 104 °F (–10 to 40 °C)
• 4 days at 14 °F (–10 °C)
• 1 month at 104 °F (40 °C)
Installed (ink packs): –4 to 104 °F (–20 to 40 °C)
• 4 days at –4 °F (–20 °C)
• 1 month at 104 °F (40 °C)
Ink freezes at –4 °F (–20 °C)
Ink thaws and is usable after 4 hours at 77 °F (25 °C)
Ink capacity Ink cartridges: 110 ml*, 350 ml, 700 ml
Initial charging cartridges: 240 ml
*110 ml cartridges may not be available depending on specifications
Ink packs: 1600 ml
(Initial charging ink packs are not available for SureColor
P8570DL/T7770DL)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
445
Related references
Ink and Maintenance Box Part Numbers
Dimension Specifications
Width SureColor P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E/T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E:
53.74 inches (1365 mm)
SureColor T5770D/T5770DM: 64.76 inches (1645 mm)
SureColor P8570D/P8570DL/T7770D/T7770DL/T7770DM: 72.75
inches (1848 mm)
Depth Printing: 32.63 inches (829 mm) with paper basket open
Storage: 19.64 inches (499 mm)
Height 38.38 inches (975 mm)
Weight
(without ink or optional
equipment)
(includes maintenance boxes and roll spindles)
SureColor P6570E/T3770E: Approximately 254 lb (115 kg)
SureColor P6570D/P6570DE/T3770D/T3770DE: Approximately
260 lb (118 kg)
SureColor T5770D: Approximately 302 lb (137 kg)
SureColor T5770DM: Approximately 331 lb (150 kg)
SureColor P8570D/T7770D: Approximately 342 lb (155 kg)
SureColor P8570DL/T7770DL: Approximately 388 lb (165 kg)
SureColor T7770DM: Approximately 366 lb (166 kg)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Power supply rating AC 100 to 240 V
Rated frequency range 50/60 Hz
Rated current 3.4 - 1.6 A
446
Power consumption
(approximate)
Printing:
SureColor P8570D/T7770D: 70 W
SureColor P6570D/P6570DE/P6570E/P8570DL/
T3770D/T3770DE/T3770E/T7770DL: 75 W
SureColor T5770D: 80 W
SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM: 90 W
Ready mode: 32 W
Sleep mode: 2.0 W
Power off mode: 0.3 W
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Temperature Operating: 50 to 95 °F (10 to 35 °C)
Operating (recommended): 59 to 77 °F (15 to 25 °C)
Storage (before unpacking): –4 to 140 °F (–20 to 60 °C)
• 120 hours at 140 °F (60 °C)
• 1 month at 104 °F (40 °C)
Storage (after unpacking; ink charged): 14 to 104 °F (-10 to 40 °C)
• 1 month at 104 °F (40 °C)
Storage (after unpacking; ink discharged): –4 to 77 °F (–20 to 25 °C)
• 1 month at 77 °F (25 °C)
Note: Make sure you use the printer at an altitude of 6561 feet (2000
m) or less
Humidity
(non-condensing)
Operating: 20 to 80%
Operating (recommended): 40 to 60%
Storage: 5 to 85%
447
Temperature and humidity
range
Operating: (diagonal lines represent recommended range)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Interface Specifications
USB Interface High-Speed USB port compatible with USB 2.0 specification (for
connection of non-encrypted USB drive for printing)
SuperSpeed USB port compatible with USB 3.2 Gen 1 Type B (USB
port for computer)
Network Interface 100BASE-TX /1000BASE-T/IEEE802.11b/g/n/ac
File system FAT, FAT32, exFAT
File format JPEG, TIFF, some PDFs, HP-GL/2*, HP RTL*, Adobe PostScript 3,
Adobe PDF 1.7
* Not all functions are supported; test for compatibility
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
448
Network Interface Specifications
Wi-Fi
Standards IEEE802.11b/g/n; IEEE802.11n (2.4 GHz, HT20 only)
IEEE802.11a/n/ac (5 GHz) [W52 (CH36 to CH48) and W53 (CH52 to
CH64) are for indoor use only]
Securities WEP (64/128bit)
WPA-PSK (TKIP)
WPA2-PSK (AES) (complies with WPA2 standards with support for
WPA/WPA2 Personal)
WPA3-SAE
WPA2-Enterprise (AES) (EAP-TLS/PEAPTLS/PEAPMSCHAPv2/EAP-
TTLS)
WPA3-Enterprise
Frequency range IEEE802.11b/g: 2.4 GHz
IEEE802.11n: 2.4 GHz (HT20 only)
IEEE 802.11a/n/ac: 5 GHz
Communication mode Infrastructure
Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) (not supported for IEEE802.11b)
Network Printing
Protocols/Functions
Windows:
• EpsonNet Print (IPv4 only)
• Standard TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6)
• WSD Printing (IPv4/IPv6)
• IPP Printing (IPv4/IPv6)
Mac:
• Bonjour (IPv4/IPv6)
• IPP Printing (IPv4/IPv6)
• AirPrint (iOS, Mac) (IPv4/IPv6)
449
Security Protocols SSL/TLS (HTTPS Server/Client, IPPS)
IEEE802.1X
IPsec/IP Filtering
SMTPS (STARTTLS, SSL/TLS
SNMPv3
SMB3.1.1
Ethernet
Standards IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
IEEE802.3ab (1000BASE-T)
IEEE802.3az (Energy Efficient Ethernet); connected device should
comply with IEEE802.3az standards
Note: Use a category 5e or higher shielded twisted pair cable for all interfaces.
Warning: To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated
indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that
is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Scanning Specifications (SureColor T5770DM/T7770DM)
Scanner type Color Simplex Sheet-Fed Scanner
Sensor RGB color filter method CIS
Effective pixels
(main scanning direction)
21600 pixels (600 dpi)
Document size Maximum: 36 × 1200 inches* (914.4 × 30480 mm)
Minimum: 5.8 × 5.8 inches (148 × 148 mm)
Document thickness 0.002 to 0.03 inches (0.06 to 0.8 mm)
450
Scanning resolution 600 dpi (main scan)
600 dpi (sub scan)
Output resolution 200, 300, 400, 600 dpi
Image data Color:
30-bit input (10 bits per pixel per color internal)
24-bit output (8 bits per pixel per color internal)
Grayscale:
10-bit input
8-bit output
Black and white:
10-bit input
1-bit output
Light source Dual LED (white)
Load direction Printable side loaded face up
Eject direction Scanned side ejected face up
Loading capacity 1 page
* Maximum length depends on data format and settings
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Safety and Approvals Specifications
United States Safety: UL62368-1
EMC: FCC part 15 Subpart B class B
Canada Safety: CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 62368-1
EMC: ICES-003 Class B
This equipment contains the following wireless module:
• Manufacturer: Epson
• Type: J26H005
451
This product conforms to Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the IC Rules. Epson cannot accept
responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended
modification of the product. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and
away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed
outdoors is subject to licensing.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment
and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102
of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and operated so that
the radiator is kept at least 7.9 inches (20 cm) or more away from a person's body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
452
Notices
Check these sections for important notices about your product.
Note: Epson offers a recycling program for end of life Epson products. Please go to this site (U.S.) or
this site (Canada) for information on how to return your Epson products for proper disposal.
Important Safety Instructions
FCC Compliance Statement
Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver
Trademarks
Copyright Notice
Important Safety Instructions
Before using your Epson product, read and follow these safety instructions.
General Product Safety Instructions
LCD Screen Safety Instructions
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions
Parent topic: Notices
General Product Safety Instructions
• Be sure to follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
• Use only the type of power source indicated on the product's label.
• Use only the power cord that comes with the product. Use of another cord may cause fires or shock.
Do not use the cord with any other equipment. Do not modify the cord.
• Place the product near a wall outlet where the plug can be easily unplugged.
• Do not route the power cord near heaters or other heat sources.
• Connect your product to a properly grounded power outlet. Avoid plugging the product into an outlet
on the same circuit as a photo copier or air control system that regularly switches on and off, or on an
outlet controlled by a wall switch or timer.
• Do not connect too many cables to the power outlet for the power cord; the temperature could rise and
cause a fire.
453
• Make sure the plug is fully inserted into the outlet.
• Do not connect the power cable to a power strip or a multi-outlet extension cord; otherwise an electric
shock or fire could occur. Supply power directly from a household power outlet (100 V AC).
• Do not let the power cord become damaged or frayed. Place it to avoid abrasions, cuts, fraying,
crimping, and kinking. Do not place objects on top of it and do not allow it to be stepped on or run over.
Be careful to keep the cord straight at each end.
• If you use an extension cord with the product, make sure the total ampere rating of the devices
plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the cord's ampere rating. Also, make sure the total
ampere rating of all devices plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the wall outlet's ampere
rating.
• If damage occurs to the plug, replace the cord set or consult a qualified electrician. If there are fuses in
the plug, make sure you replace them with fuses of the correct size and rating.
• Always turn off the product using the power button, and wait until the power light stops flashing before
unplugging the product or cutting off power to the electrical outlet.
• If you will not be using the product for a long period, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• When unplugging the plug, grip the plug itself; do not pull the power cord.
• Unplug the plug regularly and clean between the blades and around the base of the blades. If the plug
is plugged in for an extended period of time, dust collects around the base of the blades and a short
circuit or fire could occur.
• Do not use the plug if dust or any other foreign objects have adhered to the plug; otherwise an electric
shock or fire could occur.
• Place the product on a flat, stable surface that extends beyond its base in all directions. It will not
operate properly if it is tilted or at an angle.
• Do not tilt the product more than 10 degrees in any direction while moving it. Doing so may cause the
product to fall and cause damage or personal injury.
• Do not attempt to move the product alone; four people are required to move the product
• When lifting the product, place your hands as shown in the User's Guide.
• Use correct posture when lifting the product.
• Make sure to remove all packing materials from the product and installation area.
• Except when moving the product, make sure the two casters at the front are secured and the feet at
the back are touching the floor. If they are not secured, the product could move during printing and
cause an injury.
454
• Do not attempt to move the product while the casters are secured or the feet are lowered. Doing so
may cause the product to fall and cause damage or personal injury.
• When moving the product, make sure it is turned off, the power cables are unplugged from the outlets,
and all connecting cables have been removed. Avoid steps and uneven surfaces.
• Avoid locations that are subject to rapid changes in heat or humidity, shocks or vibrations, or dust.
• Do not place or store the product outdoors.
• Do not place the product near excessive heat sources or in direct sunlight.
• Leave enough room around the product for sufficient ventilation. Do not block or cover openings in the
cabinet or insert objects through the slots.
• Keep the product away from potential sources of electromagnetic interference, such as loudspeakers
or the base units of cordless telephones.
• When connecting the product to a computer or other device with a cable, ensure the correct
orientation of the connectors. Each connector has only one correct orientation. Inserting a connector
in the wrong orientation may damage both devices connected by the cable.
• Do not put your hands inside the product and be careful not to trap your hands or fingers when
opening or closing the printer covers or maintenance cover.
• Do not sit on the product or place heavy objects on top of it.
• Do not let your hands or hair get caught in the roll paper unit while it is operating.
• Do not move the print head by hand; this may damage the product.
• Do not insert or drop metallic or flammable items into the openings on the product.
• Do not spill liquid on the product or use the product with wet hands.
• Do not insert or unplug the plug with wet hands.
• Do not use aerosol products that contain flammable gases inside or around the product. Doing so may
cause fire.
• Except as specifically explained in your documentation, do not attempt to service the product yourself.
• Unplug the product and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: if
the power cord or plug is damaged; if liquid has entered the product; if the product has been dropped
or the cabinet damaged; if the product does not operate normally or exhibits a distinct change in
performance. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions.
• Leave the ink installed. Removing the ink cartridges or ink packs can dehydrate the print head and
may prevent the product from printing.
• Before storing the product, make sure the print head is positioned at the far right.
455
• When storing or transporting the product, do not tilt it, stand it on its side, or turn it upside down;
otherwise ink may leak.
• Do not use the printer in locations with volatile substances such as alcohol or thinner, or near naked
flames. An electric shock or fire could occur.
• Do not use the product if it is giving off smoke or if you notice any abnormal odors or noises. An
electric shock or fire could occur. If any abnormalities occur, turn off the power and unplug the power
cable immediately, then contact your dealer or Epson Support.
• Pay careful attention when replacing the cutter and store the cutter in a location out of the reach of
children. The cutter's blade could cause an injury.
Note: The lithium batteries in this product contain Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
Click here for details.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
LCD Screen Safety Instructions
• Use only a dry, soft cloth to clean the LCD screen. Do not use liquid or chemical cleansers. Never use
volatile chemicals such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol. Doing so could damage the surface of the
control panel.
• If the panel is particularly dirty, dampen the cloth with water containing a small amount of neutral
detergent, firmly wring the cloth dry before using it to wipe the panel, and then finish by wiping with a
soft, dry cloth.
• If the LCD screen is damaged, contact Epson. If the liquid crystal solution gets on your hands, wash
them thoroughly using large volumes of soapy water. If the liquid crystal solution gets into your eyes,
flush them with clean water for at least 15 minutes. If discomfort or vision problems remain after a
thorough flushing, see a doctor immediately. If liquid enters your mouth, see a doctor immediately.
• Do not press too hard on the LCD screen or subject it to heavy impacts.
• Use only your finger to operate the LCD screen; it may not respond when operated with wet fingers or
gloved hands.
• Do not use a pointy or sharp object, such as a pen or your fingernail, to operate the LCD screen.
• Make sure to remove the protective film from the LCD screen before operating; otherwise it may not
respond.
• If the LCD screen chips or cracks, do not touch or attempt to remove the broken pieces; contact Epson
for support.
456
• Do not subject your product to sudden changes in temperature or humidity; this may cause
condensation to develop inside the LCD screen and degrade its performance.
• The LCD screen may contain a few small bright or dark spots, and may display uneven brightness.
These are normal and do not indicate that the screen is damaged in any way.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions
Radio waves from this product may adversely affect the operation of medical equipment or automatically
controlled devices, such as pacemakers, automatic doors or fire alarms. When using this product near
such devices or inside a medical facility, follow the directions from authorized staff members at the
facility, and follow all posted warnings and directions on the device to avoid causing an accident.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
FCC Compliance Statement
For United States Users
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio and television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
WARNING
The connection of a non-shielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will invalidate the FCC
Certification or Declaration of this device and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits
established by the FCC for this equipment. It is the responsibility of the user to obtain and use a shielded
equipment interface cable with this device. If this equipment has more than one interface connector, do
not leave cables connected to unused interfaces. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
457
For Canadian Users
CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)
Parent topic: Notices
Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver
1. DISPUTES, BINDING INDIVIDUAL ARBITRATION, AND WAIVER OF CLASS ACTIONS AND
CLASS ARBITRATIONS
1.1 Disputes. The terms of this Section 1 shall apply to all Disputes between you and Epson. The term
"Dispute" is meant to have the broadest meaning permissible under law and includes any dispute, claim,
controversy or action between you and Epson arising out of or relating to this Agreement, Epson
branded products (hardware and including any related software), or other transaction involving you and
Epson, whether in contract, warranty, misrepresentation, fraud, tort, intentional tort, statute, regulation,
ordinance, or any other legal or equitable basis. "DISPUTE" DOES NOT INCLUDE IP CLAIMS, or more
specifically, a claim or cause of action for (a) trademark infringement or dilution, (b) patent infringement,
(c) copyright infringement or misuse, or (d) trade secret misappropriation (an "IP Claim"). You and Epson
also agree, notwithstanding Section 1.6,that a court, not an arbitrator, may decide if a claim or cause of
action is for an IP Claim.
1.2 Binding Arbitration. You and Epson agree that all Disputes shall be resolved by binding arbitration
according to this Agreement. ARBITRATION MEANS THAT YOU WAIVE YOUR RIGHT TO A JUDGE
OR JURY IN A COURT PROCEEDING AND YOUR GROUNDS FOR APPEAL ARE LIMITED.
Pursuant to this Agreement, binding arbitration shall be administered by JAMS, a nationally recognized
arbitration authority, pursuant to its code of procedures then in effect for consumer related disputes, but
excluding any rules that permit joinder or class actions in arbitration (for more detail on procedure, see
Section 1.6 below). You and Epson understand and agree that (a) the Federal Arbitration Act (9 U.S.C.
§1, et seq.) governs the interpretation and enforcement of this Section 1, (b) this Agreement
memorializes a transaction in interstate commerce, and (c) this Section 1 shall survive termination of this
Agreement.
1.3 Pre-Arbitration Steps and Notice. Before submitting a claim for arbitration, you and Epson agree to
try, for sixty (60) days, to resolve any Dispute informally. If Epson and you do not reach an agreement to
resolve the Dispute within the sixty (60) days), you or Epson may commence an arbitration. Notice to
Epson must be addressed to: Epson America, Inc., ATTN: Legal Department, 3131 Katella Ave., Los
Alamitos, CA 90720 (the "Epson Address"). The Dispute Notice to you will be sent to the most recent
address Epson has in its records for you. For this reason, it is important to notify us if your address
changes by emailing us at [email protected] or writing us at the Epson Address above. Notice of
the Dispute shall include the sender's name, address and contact information, the facts giving rise to the
Dispute, and the relief requested (the "Dispute Notice"). Following receipt of the Dispute Notice, Epson
and you agree to act in good faith to resolve the Dispute before commencing arbitration.
458
1.4 Small Claims Court. Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may bring an individual action in the small
claims court of your state or municipality if the action is within that court's jurisdiction and is pending only
in that court.
1.5 WAIVER OF CLASS ACTIONS AND CLASS ARBITRATIONS. YOU AND EPSON AGREE THAT
EACH PARTY MAY BRING DISPUTES AGAINST THE OTHER PARTY ONLY IN AN INDIVIDUAL
CAPACITY, AND NOT AS A PLAINTIFF OR CLASS MEMBER IN ANY CLASS OR
REPRESENTATIVE PROCEEDING, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FEDERAL OR STATE
CLASS ACTIONS, OR CLASS ARBITRATIONS. CLASS ACTION LAWSUITS, CLASS-WIDE
ARBITRATIONS, PRIVATE ATTORNEY-GENERAL ACTIONS, AND ANY OTHER PROCEEDING
WHERE SOMEONE ACTS IN A REPRESENTATIVE CAPACITY ARE NOT ALLOWED.
ACCORDINGLY, UNDER THE ARBITRATION PROCEDURES OUTLINED IN THIS SECTION, AN
ARBITRATOR SHALL NOT COMBINE OR CONSOLIDATE MORE THAN ONE PARTY'S CLAIMS
WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ALL AFFECTED PARTIES TO AN ARBITRATION
PROCEEDING.
1.6 Arbitration Procedure. If you or Epson commences arbitration, the arbitration shall be governed by
the rules of JAMS that are in effect when the arbitration is filed, excluding any rules that permit arbitration
on a class or representative basis (the "JAMS Rules"), available at http://www.jamsadr.com or by calling
1-800-352-5267, and under the rules set forth in this Agreement. All Disputes shall be resolved by a
single neutral arbitrator, and both parties shall have a reasonable opportunity to participate in the
selection of the arbitrator. The arbitrator is bound by the terms of this Agreement. The arbitrator, and not
any federal, state or local court or agency, shall have exclusive authority to resolve all disputes arising
out of or relating to the interpretation, applicability, enforceability or formation of this Agreement,
including any claim that all or any part of this Agreement is void or voidable. Notwithstanding this broad
delegation of authority to the arbitrator, a court may determine the limited question of whether a claim or
cause of action is for an IP Claim, which is excluded from the definition of "Disputes" in Section 1.1
above. The arbitrator shall be empowered to grant whatever relief would be available in a court under
law or in equity. The arbitrator may award you the same damages as a court could, and may award
declaratory or injunctive relief only in favor of the individual party seeking relief and only to the extent
necessary to provide relief warranted by that party's individual claim. In some instances, the costs of
arbitration can exceed the costs of litigation and the right to discovery may be more limited in arbitration
than in court. The arbitrator's award is binding and may be entered as a judgment in any court of
competent jurisdiction.
You may choose to engage in arbitration hearings by telephone. Arbitration hearings not conducted by
telephone shall take place in a location reasonably accessible from your primary residence, or in Orange
County, California, at your option.
a) Initiation of Arbitration Proceeding. If either you or Epson decides to arbitrate a Dispute, both parties
agree to the following procedure:
459
(i) Write a Demand for Arbitration. The demand must include a description of the Dispute and the amount
of damages sought to be recovered. You can find a copy of a Demand for Arbitration at
http://www.jamsadr.com ("Demand for Arbitration").
(ii) Send three copies of the Demand for Arbitration, plus the appropriate filing fee, to: JAMS, 500 North
State College Blvd., Suite 600 Orange, CA 92868, U.S.A.
(iii) Send one copy of the Demand for Arbitration to the other party (same address as the Dispute
Notice), or as otherwise agreed by the parties.
b) Hearing Format. During the arbitration, the amount of any settlement offer made shall not be disclosed
to the arbitrator until after the arbitrator determines the amount, if any, to which you or Epson is entitled.
The discovery or exchange of non-privileged information relevant to the Dispute may be allowed during
the arbitration.
c) Arbitration Fees. Epson shall pay, or (if applicable) reimburse you for, all JAMS filings and arbitrator
fees for any arbitration commenced (by you or Epson) pursuant to provisions of this Agreement.
d) Award in Your Favor. For Disputes in which you or Epson seeks $75,000 or less in damages exclusive
of attorney's fees and costs, if the arbitrator's decision results in an award to you in an amount greater
than Epson's last written offer, if any, to settle the Dispute, Epson will: (i) pay you $1,000 or the amount
of the award, whichever is greater; (ii) pay you twice the amount of your reasonable attorney's fees, if
any; and (iii) reimburse you for any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney
reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and pursuing the Dispute in arbitration. Except as
agreed upon by you and Epson in writing, the arbitrator shall determine the amount of fees, costs, and
expenses to be paid by Epson pursuant to this Section 1.6d).
e) Attorney's Fees. Epson will not seek its attorney's fees and expenses for any arbitration commenced
involving a Dispute under this Agreement. Your right to attorney's fees and expenses under Section
1.6d) above does not limit your rights to attorney's fees and expenses under applicable law;
notwithstanding the foregoing, the arbitrator may not award duplicative awards of attorney's fees and
expenses.
1.7 Opt-out. You may elect to opt-out (exclude yourself) from the final, binding, individual
arbitration procedure and waiver of class and representative proceedings specified in this
Agreement by sending a written letter to the Epson Address within thirty (30) days of your assent
to this Agreement (including without limitation the purchase, download, installation of the
Software or other applicable use of Epson Hardware, products and services) that specifies (i)
your name, (ii) your mailing address, and (iii) your request to be excluded from the final, binding
individual arbitration procedure and waiver of class and representative proceedings specified in
this Section 1. In the event that you opt-out consistent with the procedure set forth above, all
other terms shall continue to apply, including the requirement to provide notice prior to litigation.
1.8 Amendments to Section 1. Notwithstanding any provision in this Agreement to the contrary, you
and Epson agree that if Epson makes any future amendments to the dispute resolution procedure and
460
class action waiver provisions (other than a change to Epson's address) in this Agreement, Epson will
obtain your affirmative assent to the applicable amendment. If you do not affirmatively assent to the
applicable amendment, you are agreeing that you will arbitrate any Dispute between the parties in
accordance with the language of this Section 1 (or resolve disputes as provided for in Section 1.7, if you
timely elected to opt-out when you first assented to this Agreement).
1.9 Severability. If any provision in this Section 1 is found to be unenforceable, that provision shall be
severed with the remainder of this Agreement remaining in full force and effect. The foregoing shall not
apply to the prohibition against class or representative actions as provided in Section 1.5. This
means that if Section 1.5 is found to be unenforceable, the entire Section 1 (but only Section 1)
shall be null and void.
Parent topic: Notices
Trademarks
EPSON
®
, PrecisionCore
®
, SureColor
®
, and UltraChrome
®
are registered trademarks, and the EPSON
logo is a registered logomark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Epson Store
SM
is a service mark of Epson America, Inc.
Apple, AirPrint, AirPrint logo, Bonjour, ColorSync, iPhone, Mac, macOS, and OS X are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Google
®
is a registered trademark and Android™, Chromebook™, Gmail™, Google Chrome™, Google
Drive™, Google Play™, and YouTube™ are trademarks of Google LLC.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Wi-Fi Direct
®
is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective owners. Epson disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Parent topic: Notices
Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of Seiko Epson Corporation. The information contained herein is
461
designed only for use with this Epson product. Epson is not responsible for any use of this information as
applied to other products.
Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third
parties for damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by purchaser or third parties as a result of:
accident, misuse, or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs, or alterations to this
product, or (excluding the U.S.) failure to strictly comply with Seiko Epson Corporation's operating and
maintenance instructions.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be liable for any damages or problems arising from the use of any
options or any consumable products other than those designated as Original Epson Products or Epson
Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be held liable for any damage resulting from electromagnetic
interference that occurs from the use of any interface cables other than those designated as Epson
approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.
This information is subject to change without notice.
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products
Copyright Attribution
Parent topic: Notices
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials
Epson encourages each user to be responsible and respectful of the copyright laws when using any
Epson product. While some countries' laws permit limited copying or reuse of copyrighted material in
certain circumstances, those circumstances may not be as broad as some people assume. Contact your
legal adviser for any questions regarding copyright law.
Parent topic: Copyright Notice
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products
This product will enter sleep mode after a period of nonuse. This is to ensure that the product meets
Energy Star standards of energy efficiency. More energy savings can be achieved by setting the time to
sleep to a shorter interval.
Parent topic: Copyright Notice
Copyright Attribution
© 2023 Epson America, Inc.
